Patent Publication Number: US-2023135885-A1

Title: Method and apparatus for loading and/or unloading suture and/or a shuttle

Description:
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     This application claims the benefit of priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/260,667 filed Aug. 27, 2021, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes. 
    
    
     BACKGROUND 
     1. Technical Field 
     The present disclosure relates to systems, methods, and devices for loading suture and/or shuttles into suture devices (also referred to as suture manipulating devices). 
     2. Description Of Related Art 
     Suture devices can pass suture and/or shuttles through tissue but may need to be loaded with suture and/or a shuttle before use. 
     A need still exists to load suture and/or shuttles into suture devices without damaging the suture and/or the shuttle during the loading process. 
     SUMMARY 
     This disclosure relates generally to tissue piercers and suture devices and methods of loading and/or unloading the same. 
     A loader is disclosed. The loader can have a body. The body can have a device space. The loader can have a loader control. The loader can have a shuttle. The shuttle can be moveable from a shuttle first position to a shuttle second position via the loader control. A device can be positionable in the device space. When the device is positioned in the device space, the shuttle can be moveable from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position. The shuttle can be more contracted when the shuttle is in the shuttle second position than when the shuttle is in the shuttle first position. 
     A loader is disclosed. The loader can have a body. The body can have a device space. The loader can have a loader control. The loader can have a deflector. The loader can have a shuttle. The shuttle can be contractible and expandable. The shuttle can be contractible via the deflector. When the shuttle is in contact with the deflector, the shuttle can have a contracted configuration. A device can be positionable in the device space. When the device is positioned in the device space and the shuttle has the contracted configuration, the shuttle can be moveable into the device via the loader control. 
     A method of loading and/or unloading a device is disclosed. The method can include loading a shuttle and/or a suture into the device, and/or unloading the shuttle and/or the suture from the device. Loading the shuttle can include contracting and/or expanding the shuttle. Unloading the shuttle can include contracting and/or expanding the shuttle. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES 
       The drawings shown and described are exemplary embodiments and non-limiting. Like reference numerals indicate identical or functionally equivalent features throughout. 
         FIGS.  1   a ,  1   b  and  1   c    are perspective, top and side views, respectively, of a variation of the suture passing device. 
         FIGS.  2   a  and  2   b    are a distant and close-up view, respectively, of a variation of the shuttle in a straight configuration. 
         FIG.  2   c    is a close-up view of the variation of the shuttle from  FIGS.  2   a  and  2   b    in a curved configuration. 
         FIG.  3   a    is a close-up, perspective, partial see-through view of the distal end of a variation of the suture passing device attached to a length of a suture. 
         FIG.  3   b    is a close-up view of a portion of  FIG.  3     a.    
         FIGS.  4   a  and  4   b    are close-up perspective and side views, respectively, of the distal end of a variation of the suture passing device in a closed configuration. 
         FIG.  4   c    is a close-up of the distal end of  FIGS.  4   a    and  4   b.    
         FIG.  4   d    is a close-up perspective view of the distal end of the device of  FIG.  4   a    in a closed configuration. 
         FIGS.  5 A and  5 B  illustrate variations of the shuttle. 
         FIGS.  6 A through  6 F  are bottom and side perspective, partial see-through (the upper jaw is see-through), longitudinal cross-section, partial cut-away close-up, and partial cut-away views, respectively, of the distal end of a variation of the device with the jaws in an opened configuration with the shuttle and pushers in various positions, and with the compression cover not shown in  FIG.  6 F  for illustrative purposes. 
         FIG.  7 A  is a side perspective view of a variation of the distal end of device with the jaws in a closed configuration with the shuttle in the upper jaw and not engaged in the lower jaw. 
         FIGS.  7 B and  7 C  are longitudinal cross-section and side perspective views, respectively, of the device of  FIG.  7 A  with the shuttle in the top and bottom jaws.  FIG.  26     b  does not show the pushers for illustrative purposes. 
         FIG.  7 D  is a partial cut-away view of  FIG.  7 C . 
         FIG.  8 A  illustrates a variation of the shuttle in a lower jaw with half the lower jaw shown transparent. 
         FIG.  8 B  illustrates a variation of the shuttle in a lower jaw with half the lower jaw shown transparent. 
         FIG.  9 A  illustrates a variation of the shuttle in an upper jaw with half the upper jaw shown transparent. 
         FIG.  9 B  illustrates a variation of the shuttle in an upper jaw with half the upper jaw shown transparent. 
         FIG.  10    illustrates a variation of the device with half the lower and upper jaws shown transparent. 
         FIG.  11 A  illustrates a perspective view of a variation of a shuttle. 
         FIG.  11 B  illustrates a bottom view of the shuttle of  FIG.  11 A . 
         FIG.  11 C  illustrates a side view of the shuttle of  FIG.  11 A . 
         FIG.  11 D  illustrates a front perspective view of a variation of a shuttle. 
         FIG.  11 E  illustrates a rear perspective view of the shuttle of  FIG.  11 D   
         FIG.  11 F  illustrates a front perspective view of a variation of a shuttle. 
         FIG.  11 G  illustrates a rear perspective view of the shuttle of  FIG.  11 F . 
         FIG.  12 A  illustrates a side view of a variation of the device with half the device shown transparent. 
         FIG.  12 B  illustrates a perspective view of the device of  FIG.  12 A . 
         FIG.  13 A  illustrates a variation of the device. 
         FIG.  13 B  illustrates a variation of the device. 
         FIG.  13 C  illustrates a variation of a handle of the device. 
         FIG.  13 D  illustrates a variation of a handle of the device. 
         FIG.  13 E  illustrates a variation of a handle of the device. 
         FIG.  14 A  illustrates a top view of a variation of a loader. 
         FIG.  14 B  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  14 C  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  14 D  illustrates a perspective view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  14 E  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  14 F  illustrates a perspective view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  15 A  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  15 B  illustrates a perspective view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  15 C  illustrates a magnified perspective view of the loader of  FIG.  15 B . 
         FIG.  15 D  illustrates a magnified perspective view of the loader of  FIG.  15 C . 
         FIG.  15 E  illustrates a magnified perspective cross-sectional view of the loader of  FIG.  15 D . 
         FIG.  15 F  illustrates a magnified perspective cross-sectional view of the loader of  FIG.  15 E . 
         FIG.  16    illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  17 A  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  17 B  is a magnified view of the loader of  FIG.  17 A  at section  17 B- 17 B. 
         FIG.  17 C  is a perspective view of  FIG.  17 B . 
         FIG.  18    is a bottom view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  14 A . 
         FIG.  19 A  is a perspective view of a variation of a loader control. 
         FIG.  19 B  is a perspective view of the loader control of  FIG.  19 A  with suture. 
         FIG.  20 A  is a perspective view of a variation of a loader control in an open configuration. 
         FIG.  20 B  is a perspective view of the loader control of  FIG.  20 A  in a first closed configuration. 
         FIG.  20 C  is a perspective view of the loader control of  FIG.  20 A  in a second closed configuration. 
         FIG.  20 D  is a top view a component of the loader control of  FIG.  20 A . 
         FIG.  20 E  is a side view of the component of  FIG.  20 D . 
         FIG.  20 F  is a magnified view of section  20 F- 20 F in  FIG.  20 E . 
         FIG.  20 G  is a front view of the component of  FIG.  20 E  taken along line  20 G- 20 G. 
         FIG.  20 H  is a bottom view of the component of  FIG.  20 D . 
         FIG.  20 I  is a bottom view of a component of the loader control of  FIG.  20 A . 
         FIG.  20 J  is a side view of the component of  FIG.  20 I . 
         FIG.  20 K  is a cross-sectional view of the component of  FIG.  20 J  taken along line  20 K- 20 K. 
         FIG.  20 L  is a front view of the component of  FIG.  20 J  taken along line  20 L- 20 L. 
         FIG.  20 M  is a top view of the component of  FIG.  20 I . 
         FIG.  20 N  is a cross-sectional view of the component of  FIG.  20 M  taken along line  20 N- 20 N. 
         FIG.  20 O  is a perspective view of the component of  FIG.  20 I . 
         FIG.  21 A  illustrates a top view of a variation of a loader. 
         FIG.  21 B  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 C  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 D  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 E  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 F  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 G  illustrates a top view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 H  is a magnified view of section  21 H- 21 H in  FIG.  21 G . 
         FIG.  21 I  illustrates a magnified perspective view of the loader of  FIG.  21 H . 
         FIG.  21 J  illustrates a magnified perspective view of the loader of  FIG.  21 H . 
         FIG.  21 K  illustrates a magnified perspective view of the loader of  FIG.  21 H . 
         FIG.  21 L  illustrates a magnified perspective view of the loader of  FIG.  21 H . 
         FIG.  21 M  illustrates a magnified perspective view of the loader of  FIG.  21 H . 
         FIG.  21 N  illustrates a side view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 O  illustrates a side view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 P  illustrates a side view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 Q  illustrates a bottom perspective view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 R  illustrates a bottom perspective view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
         FIG.  21 S  illustrates a top perspective view of a variation of the loader of  FIG.  21 A . 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION 
       FIGS.  1   a  through  1   c    illustrate a suture passing device  188  that can be used to pass suture  70  through soft or hard tissue  74  with or without removing the device  188  or the suture  70  from the target site while creating one or more complete stitches. 
     The suture passing device  188  can have an ergonomic handle  104 , a sliding tube actuator  6 , and a distal end  2 . The ergonomic handle  104  can be used to control the distal end  2 . The ergonomic handle  104  can have a side knob  10 . The ergonomic handle  104  can have a top knob  12 . The top knob  12  and/or the side knob  10  can individually or in concert, advance and/or retract the upper  86  and/or lower pusher  76 . 
     The sliding tube actuator  6  can have an outer compression cover  34  and an inner rod (not shown due to obstruction by the outer compression cover  34 ). The inner rod can be fixedly attached to the handle  104  and the proximal end of the jaw structure  28 . The outer compression cover  34  can be radially outside of the inner rod. The outer compression cover  34  can be actuated by the handle  104 , for example be distally and proximally translated with respect to the handle  104  when the trigger  8  is squeezed or released. 
       FIGS.  2   a  and  2   b    illustrate that the device  188  can have a sliding ribbon shuttle  14  or needle held within the device  188 . The shuttle  14  can have an elongated shuttle rail  16 . The shuttle rail  16  can have numerous slits  20  along one or both sides of the shuttle rail  16 . The slits  20  can be positioned at regular or irregular length intervals along the rail  16 . 
     The shuttle  14  can have a suture holder  18  extending laterally from the rail  16 . The shuttle  14 , for example the suture holder  18 , can extend out of the lateral side slot  72  of the arm structure. The suture holder  18  can extend from the left and/or right side of the device  188 . The distal end  2  of the device  188  can be reversible so the suture holder  18  can be switched from one side of the device  188  to the other side of the device  188 . The suture holder  18  can have a generally flat, isosceles trapezoid configuration. The suture holder  18  can have a suture holding notch  100 . The notch  100  can have an inner hole  17   a , an outer hole  17   b  contiguous with the inner hole  17   a , and a first cleat  97   a  positioned between the inner hole  17   a  and the outer hole  17   b . The notch  100  can have a second cleat  97   b  on the side of the outer hole away from the inner hole. The notch  100  can be configured to secure to suture  70 . For example, the suture  70  can be compressed and friction fit in the inner cleat  97   a.    
     The suture holder  18  can have a front leading edge and a rear leading edge. The edges can be slanted at a right or non-right angle with respect to the longitudinal axis of the rail  16 . One or both of the edges can be sharpened to be traumatic to tissue  74 , for example to cut through soft tissue  74 . The edges can cut through tissue  74 , allowing the suture holder  18  to pull the suture  70  through the tissue  74  immediately behind the respective edge. 
     The shuttle  14  can be made from a flexible polymer, such as PEEK, a resilient metal such as Nitinol, any material disclosed herein or combinations thereof. The shuttle  14  can be made from a molded polymer. The shuttle  14  can be pre-curved, for example to reduce resistance when going around curves in the tracks. 
       FIG.  2   c    illustrates that the rail  16  can curve at the locations of the slits  20 , and/or the rail  16  can be pre-curved. 
       FIGS.  3   a  and  3   b    illustrate that the suture passing device  188  can capture or releasably attach to the suture  70  in the inner and/or outer cleats  97   a  and/or  97   b  of the suture holder  18 . The suture  70  can be loaded or held laterally of the jaw structure  28 , out of plane with the rotation of the jaws. The device  188  can make multiple passes of the suture  70  through the tissue  74  without extracting or reloading the suture passing device  188 . The jaw structure  28  can resiliently deform open at the proximal end of the jaw structure  28 , having no hinge. The jaws can be opened and/or closed with no mechanical pivots or linkages in the jaw structure  28 . 
       FIG.  4   a    illustrates that the suture passer device  188  can have a jaw structure  28  with a top jaw  30  and a bottom jaw  38 . The entire jaw structure  28  can be an integral piece of material, such as a single molded, cast, or cut element of Nitinol, other resilient metal or polymer, any other material listed herein, or combinations thereof. The jaw structure  28  can be configured to be in an opened configuration (as shown in  FIG.  4   d   ) when in an unbiased configuration (i.e., when no external forces are applied). 
     The jaw structure  28  can have a jaw structure longitudinal axis  42 . Each jaw can also have a respective jaw longitudinal axis along the jaw. 
     The inside channel of the compression cover  34  can be sized and shaped to fit over the jaw structure  28  with minimum clearance when the jaw structure  28  is in a closed configuration. When the compression cover is translated distally  138  with respect to the jaw structure  28 , as shown by arrow, the compression cover  34  can press the top and bottom jaws  38  toward the jaw structure longitudinal axis  42 . The jaw structure  28  can be fully compressed into a closed configuration, as shown in  FIGS.  4   a  through  4   c   . In this way, when an actuation lever such as the trigger  8  is actuated, the channel or compression cover  34  can advance to cam closed the jaws. The jaws can pre-pierce the tissue and establish a continuous track for the shuttle to pass through the tissue. 
     The compression cover  34  can be attached to an opening ball  32  positioned between the first and second jaws. 
       FIG.  4   b    illustrates that the opening ball  32  can be rotatably or fixedly attached to a ball axle  52  passing laterally through the opening ball  32 . The ball axle  52  can extend out from the lateral sides of the ball  32 . The ball axle  52  can be slidably received by axle slots  50  formed through distal arms  54  or extensions  138  of the compression cover  34 . When the jaw structure  28  is in a closed configuration, the ball axle  52  can abut and interference fit against the proximal end of the axle slot  50 , for example to prevent overextension of the compression cover  34  over the jaw structure  28 . When the jaw structure  28  is in an opened configuration, the ball axle  52  can abut and interference fit against the distal end  2  of the axle slot  50 , for example to prevent overrotation of the jaws and/or pulling the ball  32  past the ramps  44  on the inside of the jaw structure  28 . 
       FIG.  4   c    illustrates that the bottom track  66  can distally terminate in a bottom track port  62 . The top track  64  can distally terminate at a top track port  60 . The top track port  60  can align with and be adjacent to (as shown) or in contact with the bottom track port  62  when the jaw structure  28  is in a closed configuration with the first jaw tip  46  interdigitating with the second jaw tip  48 . The tracks of the upper jaw  78  and bottom jaw  38  can form a continuous path when the jaw structure  28  is in a closed configuration. The first jaw tip  46  can interdigitate with and be adjacent or in contact with the second jaw tip  48  when the jaw structure  28  is in a closed configuration. 
       FIG.  4   d    illustrates that that compression cover  34  can be translated proximally  126 , as shown by arrow, with respect to the jaw structure  28 . The ball axle  52  can slide to the distal end  2  of the axle slot  50 . The axle slot  50  can then pull the ball axle  52 , and therefore the opening ball  32 , proximally. The opening ball  32  can then press against the inside surface ramp  44  of the first jaw and/or second jaw. The first jaw tip  46  and/or second jaw tip  48  can then rotate away from the opposing jaw tip. The jaw structure  28  can then be in an opened configuration, as shown. 
     The proximal ends of the jaws can be rigid or flexible, for example to bend around the opening of the compression cover  34  when the jaws are in an opened configuration. The entire jaws or just the proximal ends of the jaws can be made from Nitinol, for example with the distal ends of the jaws made from stainless steel. 
       FIG.  5 A  illustrates that the suture holder  18  can be an arc integral with the shuttle spine  160 . For example, the shuttle  14  can be made from a single panel of material (e.g., metal). The lateral sides of the suture holder  18  can be cut, and the longitudinal ends can remain integrated with the shuttle spine  160 . The suture holder  18  can then be bent or otherwise deformed away from the plane of the shuttle spine  160 , for example forming an arc away from the plane of the shuttle spine  160 . 
     The suture  70  can have a suture loop  162  at the terminal end of the suture  70 . The suture loop  162  can extend around and completely or partially circumscribe the suture holder  18 . The remainder of the suture  70  can be integral with the suture loop  162 , or can removably attached to the suture loop  162 . The suture loop  162  can be circular or oval. 
       FIG.  5 B  illustrates that the shuttle  14  can have one or more shuttle notches  166  or cut-outs. For example, the shuttle  14  can have two shuttle notches  166  on each lateral site of the shuttle. The shuttle notches  166  can be even longitudinally spaced and distributed along the shuttle  14 . The shuttle notches  166  can be curved. The sides of the shuttle  14 , other than at the notches, can be straight. 
     A radius of curvature of the shuttle notch  166  can be from about 1 mm to about 2 mm. 
       FIGS.  6 A through  6 F  illustrate that the upper jaw tip  206  and/or lower jaw tip  198  can have suture holder slots  238 . The suture holder slots  238  can extend medially along the outer surface of the respective jaw tip. The suture holder slot  238  can extend from the outer surface of the jaw tip to the respective track. The suture holder  18  can be accessible through or extend out of the suture holder slot  238 . The suture  70  (not shown) can attach to or be integral with the suture holder  18  in or outside of the suture holder slot  238 . 
     The upper track  264  can distally terminate at an upper jaw tip shuttle port  240 . The lower track  148  can distally terminate at a lower jaw tip shuttle port  256 . The shuttle  14  can extend out of or into, and pass through each of the shuttle  14  ports. During use, the sharpened shuttle tip  164  extending out of the shuttle port can pierce, cut and dissect tissue  74  when the jaws are rotated to a closed configuration. 
     The upper jaw  78  and/or lower jaw  80  can have a jaw stop  242 . The jaw stop  242  can be a feature, shape or configuration that can abut and stop the distal translation of the compression cover  34  with respect to the jaws. For example, the distal terminal end of the compression cover  34  can abut the jaw stops  242  when the jaws are in a closed configuration. 
     The radially inner surface of the jaws can have radially inner slopes  250 . 
     The upper jaw  78  and/or lower jaw  80  can have a jaw slide  244 . The jaw slide  244  can be a radially outer surface of the jaws between the jaw stops  242  and the compression cover  34  when the compression cover  34  is in a proximally retracted  126  position with respect to the jaws and/or the jaws are in an opened configuration. The jaw slide  244  can increase in radius from the jaw structure longitudinal axis  42  in the distal longitudinal direction (e.g., the larger the longitudinal dimension of the jaw slide  244 , the larger the radial dimension of the jaw slide  244 ). When the compression cover is translated distally  138  with respect to the jaws, the radially inner distal edge of the compression cover  34  can slide along the jaw slide  244 , and press the jaw slide  244  toward the jaw structure longitudinal axis  42 . A radially compressive force delivered from the compression cover  34  to the jaw slide  244  can create a torque in the respective jaw, rotating the respective jaw toward the jaw structure longitudinal axis  42  and the opposing jaw. 
     The device  188  can have a jaw control extension  40 . The jaw control extension  40  can extend along the jaw structure longitudinal axis  42 . The jaw control extension  40  can extend between the jaws proximal to the jaw tips. The jaw control extensions  40  can terminate in a jaw control extension head  254 . 
     The jaw control extension head  254  can have one or two lobes or cams. Each lobe can extend from the longitudinal axis of the jaw control extension  40  toward a jaw. The lobes can act similarly to the opening roller ball shown in  FIGS.  4   a ,  4   d   , and elsewhere herein. The upper jaw  78  and lower jaw  80  can have upper and inner jaw radially inner slopes  250 , respectively. The inner slopes can be the radially inner surfaces of the jaws proximal to the jaw tips and distal to the jaw control extension head  254  when the jaw control extension head  254  is in a proximally retracted position with respect to the jaws. The radially inner slope  250  can increase in radius from the jaw structure longitudinal axis  42  in the distal longitudinal direction (e.g., the larger the longitudinal dimension of the radially inner slope  250 , the larger the radial dimension of the radially inner slope  250 ). When the jaw control extension  40  is proximally translated or retracted with respect to the jaws, the lobes can slide against the radially inner slopes  250  of the jaws and press the jaws away from each other into an open configuration. 
     When the jaws are in an open configuration, the compression cover  34  can be positioned at or proximally past the proximal end of the jaw slides  244 , and the jaw extension head can be positioned at or proximally past the proximal end of the radially inner slopes  250 . 
     The jaw control extension  40  can be attached to or integral with a control rail  248 . The control rail  248  can extend radially from one or both lateral sides of the jaw control extension  40 , for example in a plane at a right angle to a plane defined by the opposing jaws or the opposing extension head lobes  252 . 
     The compression cover  34  can have a control rail slot  246 . The control rail slot  246  can extend to the distal terminal end of the compression cover  34 . The control rail  248  can be fixed to or longitudinally translate within the control rail slot  246 . The control rail  248  can interference fit, abut or stop against the proximal end of the control rail slot  246 , for example when the control rail  248  is in a proximal or distal longitudinal position with respect to the jaws. The control rail  248  can move longitudinally in unison (i.e., coincidentally) with the compression cover  34  in the distal and/or longitudinal directions. The control rail  248  can move longitudinally in unison with the jaw control extension  40  in the distal and/or longitudinal directions. 
     The device  188  can have an upper socket arm  258  and a lower socket arm  270  radially inside of the compression cover  34 . The upper socket arm  258  and lower socket arm  270  can be a single integrated element (e.g., a hollow cylinder) or separate elements. The upper socket arm  258  can be opposite the lower socket arm  270 . The upper socket arm  258  can be translatably fixed (i.e., mechanically attached to translate in unison) to the lower socket arm  270 . The jaw control extension  40  can extend longitudinally between the upper  258  and lower socket arms  270  or within a hollow channel inside a unitary socket arm (comprising the upper  258  and lower socket arms  270  as an integrated element). The distal terminal ends of the socket arms can extend to or proximal to the distal terminal end of the compression cover  34  when the jaws are in an open configuration. 
     The proximal terminal end of the upper jaw  78  can have a laterally elongated upper jaw bearing  262 . The upper jaw bearing  262  can extend radially outward from the remainder for the proximal end of the upper jaw  78 . 
     The distal end  2  of the upper socket arm  258  can have a laterally elongated upper jaw socket  260 . The upper jaw socket  260  can open medially and have a diameter approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the upper jaw bearing  262 . 
     An upper jaw  78  hinge can have the upper jaw bearing  262  and the upper jaw socket  260 . The upper jaw  78  can rotate around the transverse axis of the upper jaw bearing  262 . The upper jaw bearing  262  can rotate in the upper jaw socket  260 . 
     The proximal terminal end of the lower jaw  80  can have a laterally elongated lower jaw bearing  266 . The lower jaw bearing  266  can extend radially outward from the remainder for the proximal end of the lower jaw  80 . 
     The distal end  2  of the lower socket arm  270  can have a laterally elongated lower jaw socket  268 . The lower jaw socket  268  can open medially and have a diameter approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the lower jaw bearing  266 . 
     A lower jaw  80  hinge can have the lower jaw bearing  266  and the lower jaw socket  268 . The lower jaw  80  can rotate around the transverse axis of the lower jaw bearing  266 . The lower jaw bearing  266  can rotate in the lower jaw socket  268 . 
     The upper  86  and/or lower pushers  76  can have entire lengths or only distal ends  2  that can have articulated segmentations  286 . The articulated segments  286  can rotate with respect to each other around an axis perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the respective pusher. The articulated segmentations  286  can be connected by a discrete hinge (e.g., a pin or snap connection) or can be longitudinally coincidental or longitudinally alternating lateral slots cut into the sides of the pusher, similar to the shape of the shuttle lateral slots  158 . The proximal end of either or both upper  86  and lower pushers  76  can have a continuous, non-segmented, flat, uniform ribbon of material. 
     Each of the upper  86  and/or lower pushers  76  can have distal terminal ends that can have a shuttle seat  274 . The shuttle seat  274  can be an inverse shape to the shape of the shuttle tip  164 . For example, if the shuttle tip  164  has an angled end, the shuttle seat  274  can have the opposite angle. If the shuttle tip  164  has a convex curved end, the shuttle seat  274  can have a concave curved end with the same radius of curvature as the shuttle tip  164 . 
       FIGS.  7 A through  7 D  illustrate that the compression cover  34  can be distally translated, as shown by arrow, with respect to the jaws. The compression cover  34  can deliver translational force through the edges of the control rail slot  246  to the control rail  248 . The control rail  248  can deliver the translational force to the jaw control extension  40 . The jaw control extension  40  can translate distally, as shown by arrow, concurrently with the compression cover  34 . The compression cover  34  can translate  138  over the jaw slides  244 , pressing radially inward on the jaw slides  244 . The jaw control extension head  254  can move distally with respect to the jaws, as shown by arrow  280 , for example, allowing the closure of the jaws without interference fitting or abutting against the jaw control extension head  254 . The upper jaw  78  and/or lower jaw  80  can rotate radially inward, as shown by arrows. 
     When the jaws are in a closed configuration, the compression cover  34  can be positioned at or adjacent to the jaw stop  242 , and the jaw extension head can be positioned at or proximally past the proximal end of the radially inner slopes  250 . 
     When the jaws are in a closed configuration, if the shuttle  14  is in the upper track  264 , the upper pusher  86  can translate distally through the upper track  264 . The distal terminal end of the upper pusher  86  can abut the shuttle  14 . The upper pusher  86  can then push the shuttle  14  through the upper track  264 , out the upper jaw tip shuttle port  240  and into the lower jaw tip shuttle port  256 . 
     When the jaws are in a closed configuration, if the shuttle  14  is in the lower track  148 , the lower pusher  76  can translate distally through the lower track  148 . The distal terminal end of the lower pusher  76  can abut the shuttle  14 . The lower pusher  76  can then push the shuttle  14  through the lower track  148 , out the lower jaw tip shuttle port  256  and into the upper jaw tip shuttle port  240 . 
     When the shuttle  14  is pushed from the upper track  264  to the lower track  148  or vice versa, the shuttle  14  can be curvilinearly translated  282 , as shown by arrow, following the paths of the upper track  264  and the lower track  148 . 
     When the jaws are in a closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can move from the upper jaw  78  to the lower jaw  80 , as shown by arrow, back to the upper jaw  78 , and can repeat the motion from the upper jaw  78  to the lower jaw  80 , and optionally from the lower jaw  80  to the upper jaw  78  one, two or more times. 
     The device  188  can have a pusher lockout that can prevent translation of the pushers and the shuttle  14  when the jaws are in an open configuration. 
     The device  188  can have a jaw lockout preventing opening of the jaws when either of the pushers is extended out of the respective jaw tip shuttle port and/or when the shuttle  14  is concurrently in the upper jaw  78  and the lower jaw  80 . 
       FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the suture holder  18  can be attached to or integrated with the shuttle  14 . For example, the suture holder  18  can be a bridge integrated with the shuttle spine  160 . A portion of the shuttle spine  160  can define the suture holder  18 . As another example, the suture holder  18  can be removably attached to the shuttle  14 . The suture holder  18  can extend between a shuttle first lateral side and a shuttle second lateral side. The suture holder can extend between a shuttle first longitudinal side and a shuttle second longitudinal side. The suture holder  18  can be in the longitudinal center of the shuttle  14 , on a proximal end of the shuttle  14 , or on a distal end of the shuttle  14 . A center of the suture holder  18  can be in the transverse center of the shuttle  14 , on a first lateral side of the shuttle, or on a second lateral side of the shuttle. The suture holder  18  can be in the plane of the shuttle spine  160 , extend away from the plane of the shuttle spine  160 , or both. For example,  FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the suture holder  18  does not extend away from the plane of the shuttle spine  160 . The plane of the suture holder  18  can be flush with or coincident with the plane of the shuttle spine  160 . This can advantageously allow the shuttle and suture holder  14 ,  18  to take up less space, thereby minimizing the trauma to surrounding tissue as the shuttle  14  is passed between the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  since it brings the base of the suture  70  closer to the shuttle  14 . With the suture  70  closer to the shuttle  14 , the force of the suture  70  against surrounding tissue is reduced as compared to when the suture  70  is connected to a structure out of the plane of the shuttle spine  160  (e.g., the suture holder  18  of  FIGS.  5 A and  5 B ). The shuttle and suture holder  18  can be a monolithic structure. The suture loop  162  can extend around and completely or partially circumscribe the suture holder  18 . The remainder of the suture  70  can be integral with the suture loop  162 , or can removably attached to the suture loop  162 . The suture loop  162  can be attached to or integrated with the suture  70  at a suture junction  73 . The suture junction  73  can be a knot, a braid, or both. The suture loop  162  can be circular, oval, or stadium-shaped. 
     The shuttle  14  can have zero, one, or multiple suture holes  404 , for example, 0 to 4 or more suture holes  404 , including every 1 suture hole increment within this range. For example,  FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the shuttle  14  can have a first suture hole  404   a  and a second suture hole  404   b . The shuttle holes  404  (e.g., first and second suture holes  404   a ,  404   b ) can have a regular or irregular shape, for example, curved, polygonal, or both. The suture holes  404  can be defined by one or more curved surfaces or curved edges, for example, one or more curved surfaces or curved edges of the shuttle  14 . The suture holes  404  can be defined by one or more flat surfaces or straight edges, for example, one or more flat surfaces or straight edges of the shuttle  14 . The suture holes  404  can have a cross-sectional shape of a circle, ellipse, rectangle, stadium, horseshoe, star, slot, or any combination thereof. The suture holes  404  can have such cross-sectional shapes when the shuttle is curved or flat. The suture holes  404  can have a constant cross-sectional area or a tapered cross-sectional area. 
     The shuttle tips  164  can be beveled, non-beveled, or both. For example,  FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the shuttle tips  164  can be non-beveled. The shuttle tips  164  can have one or multiple tip surfaces  406 , for example, 1 to 4 or more tip surfaces  406 , including every 1 tip surface increment within this range (e.g., 1 tip surface, 2 tip surfaces). For example,  FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the shuttle tips  164  can have a first tip surface  406   a  (e.g., a first non-beveled tip surface as shown in  FIG.  8 A ) and a second tip surface  406   b  (e.g., a second non-beveled tip surface as shown in  FIG.  8 A ). The non-beveled portion of the shuttle tips  164  can advantageously improve the force transfer from the upper and lower pushers  86 ,  76 , thereby making it easier for the pushers  86  and  76  to push against the shuttle  14 . A larger component of the force from the pushers (e.g., pushers  86  and  76 ) can be transferred along the longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  when the shuttle tip  164  has a non-beveled surface  406  as compared to a beveled surface (e.g., the beveled surfaces shown in  FIGS.  5 A and  5 B  at the tips of the shuttle). For beveled surfaces, a portion of the force applied to the shuttle  14  is directed against the surfaces that define the lower and upper tracks  66 ,  64  perpendicularly away from the beveled surface. When a pusher applies a longitudinal force against a beveled surface, a portion of the longitudinal force applied to the shuttle  14  by the pusher is transformed into a transverse component away from the longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . 
       FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the shuttle tips  164  can be tapered to form a terminal tip  165 . The terminal tip  165  can be an edge or part of a rounded or flat surface. The tapered portion of the shuttle tip  164  can be a first bevel, for example, a first transverse bevel toward a longitudinal axis (e.g., center longitudinal axis) of the shuttle  14 . The non-beveled surfaces  406  can thereby form first tissue cutting surfaces that are beveled in a first direction. The bevel referred to in the preceding paragraph can refer to a second bevel, for example, a second transverse bevel angled relative to a transverse axis perpendicular to the transverse axis of the first bevel and toward a longitudinal axis (e.g., center longitudinal axis) of the shuttle  14 . Such a second bevel is shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G  at the tips of the shuttle, for example, without a first bevel (e.g., the first bevel shown in  FIGS.  5 A and  5 B ). The second bevels can define second beveled surfaces along the taper that face a second direction different from the first direction. The second bevels can form second tissue cutting surfaces. The shuttle tips can pierce or cut tissue. The tapered portion of the shuttle tips  164  can pierce or cut tissue. The tip surfaces  406  (e.g., tip surfaces  406   a  and  406   b ) can pierce or cut tissue. When the shuttle tips  164  have first and second bevels, the first and second bevels can pierce tissue or cut tissue.  FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the shuttle tips  164  can be non-sharpened, meaning that while the edges are tapered to form a first cutting surface, the cutting surfaces  406  themselves can be chamfered or non-chamfered. The shuttle tips  164  can be non-sharpened and still cut or pierce tissue, where sharpened or non-sharpened can refer to the presence or non-presence of a second bevel (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G ), respectively. 
       FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the device  188  can have one or multiple male stops  412  (also referred to as male catches, male detents, stops, catchers, detents) and one or multiple female stops  416  (also referred to as female catches, female detents, stops, catchers, detents). The device  188  can have, for example, 1-10 or more male stops  412 , including every 1 male stop increment within this range (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4 or more male stops). The device  188  can have, for example, 1-10 or more female stops  416 , including every 1 female stop increment within this range (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4 or more female stops). 
     The male stops  412  can be attached to or integrated with the device  188 . For example, the male stops  412  can be part of, attached to, or integrated with the shuttle  14 . As another example, the male stops  412  can be part of, attached to, or integrated with the jaws (e.g., jaws  30 ,  38 ,  78 ,  80 ). As yet another example, the device  188  can have some male stops  412  that are part of, attached to, or integrated with the shuttle  14  and can have some male stops  412  that are part of, attached to, or integrated with the jaws (e.g., jaws  330 ,  38 ,  78 ,  80 ). As yet still another example, the male stops  412  can be part of, attached to, or integrated with the pushers (e.g., the lower and upper pushers  76 ,  86 ). 
     The female stops  416  can be attached to or integrated with the device  188 . For example, the female stops  416  can be part of, attached to, or integrated with the shuttle  14 . As another example, the female stops  416  can be part of, attached to, or integrated with the jaws (e.g., jaws  330 ,  38 ,  78 ,  80 ). As yet another example, the device  188  can have some female stops  416  that are part of, attached to, or integrated with the shuttle  14  and can have some female stops  416  that are part of, attached to, or integrated with the jaws (e.g., jaws  330 ,  38 ,  78 ,  80 ). As yet still another example, the female stops  416  can be part of, attached to, or integrated with the pushers (e.g., the lower and upper pushers  76 ,  86 ). 
       FIGS.  8 A- 9 B  illustrate, for example, that the shuttle  14  can have the male stops  412  and that the jaws (e.g., jaws  330 ,  38 ,  78 ,  80 ) can have the female stops  416 . For example,  FIGS.  8 A- 9 B  illustrate that the shuttle  14  can have a first male stop  412   a  and a second male stop  412   b , that the lower jaw (e.g., jaw  38 ,  80 ) can have a first female stop  416   a  (also referred to as the lower jaw first female stop  416   a  and other similar terms) configured to releasably engage with or releasably attach to the first male stop  412   a , and that the upper jaw (e.g., jaw  30 , jaw  78 ) can have a second female stop  416   b  (also referred to as the upper jaw first female stop  416   b  and other similar terms) configured to releasably engage with or releasably attach to the second male stop  412   b . Half of the lower and upper jaws are shown transparent in  FIGS.  8 A- 9 B  so that the shuttle  14  can be more easily seen in the jaw tracks (e.g., lower and upper tracks  66 ,  64 ), and so that the male and female stops  412 ,  416  can be more easily seen. 
     Each male stop  412  can releasably fit into, attach to, or engage with a corresponding female stop  416 , for example, via a friction fit, snap fit, magnetic fit, ratchet fit, or any combination thereof. For example, the first male stop  412   a  can be configured to releasably attach to the first female stop  416   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can be configured to releasably attach to the second female stop  416   b . When two stops (e.g., male and female stops  412 ,  416 ) are releasably attached to one another, a threshold release force can be required to release the stops from one another. The threshold release force can be from about 1.0 Newton to about 10.0 Newtons or more, including every 0.5 Newton increment within this range (e.g., 4.0 Newtons, 4.5 Newtons, 5.0 Newtons). As another example, the release force can be from about 0.5 lbs to about 1.5 lbs, including every 0.1 lb increment within this range (e.g., 1.0 lb). 
     The male stops  412  can be a positive feature such as a protrusion, bump, ridge, arm, extension, flexure, detent flexure, or any combination thereof. The male stops  412  can be straight and/or curved. The male stops  412  can be flexible, rigid, or both (e.g., a first portion can be flexible and a second portion can be rigid). The male stops  412  can be one or more springs. The female stops  416  can be a negative feature such as a void, space, pocket, notch, hole, through hole, recess, detent recess, or any combination thereof. The female stops  416  can be flexible, rigid, or both (e.g., a first portion can be flexible and a second portion can be rigid). The male and female stops  412 ,  416  can include magnets that attract one another to keep the male and female stops releasably attached together. 
     The male stops  412  can have a male surface  414  and the female stops  416  can have a female surface  418 . The male and female surfaces  414 ,  418  can be configured to engage with one another, slidably engage with one another, contact one another other, or any combination thereof. The female stops  416  can have a lip  420  configured to engage with, slidably engage with, or contact the male stop  412 , or any combination thereof. The male stops  412  can be configured to engage with, slidably engage with, or contact the lip  420 , or any combination thereof. 
     For each male-female stop pair, the male and female surfaces  414 , 418  can engage with one another and/or the male stop  412  can engage with the lip  420 , for example, when the male stop  412  is being forced into the female stop  416 , when the male stop  412  is being withdrawn from the female stop  416 , when the female stop  416  is being forced over or onto the male stop  412 , when the female stop  416  is being withdrawn from the male stop  412 , when the male and female stops  412 ,  416  are attached to one another (also referred to as the stopped position, caught position, fixed position), or any combination thereof. As another example, two female stops  416  can engage with one another, for example, where the two female stops  416  include a magnet. As yet another example, two male stops  412  can engage with one another, for example, where the two male stops include a magnet. The male and/or female stops  412 ,  416  can form a hook or hook-like feature to releasably catch the other stop. 
     The male stops  412  can move relative to the female stops  416 , vice versa, or both. The female stops  416  can move relative to the male stops  412 , vice versa, or both. For example,  FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the male stops  412  can be translatable (e.g., slidably translatable) in the lower jaw track, for example, in a first direction toward the first female stop  416   a  and in a second direction away from the first female stop  416   a , or vice versa such that the first female stop  416   a  is translatable toward and away from a male stops  412  (e.g., for arrangements where the female stop  416  is integrated with or attached to the shuttle  14  and the male stop  412  is integrated with or attached to the lower jaw). As another example,  FIG.  9 A  illustrates that the male stops  412  can be translatable (e.g., slidably translatable) in the upper jaw track, for example, in a first direction toward the second female stop  416   b  and in a second direction away from the second female stop  416   b , or vice versa such that the second female stop  416   b  is translatable toward and away from a male stop  412  (e.g., for arrangements where the female stop  416  is integrated with or attached to the shuttle  14  and the male stop  412  is integrated with or attached to the upper jaw). The first and second directions can be opposite from one another. 
       FIGS.  8 A and  8 B  illustrate that when the shuttle  14  is being translated (e.g., pushed by the upper jaw pusher  86 , pulled by the lower jaw pusher  76 , or both) in a first direction in the lower jaw track toward the first female stop  416   a , the lip  420  can exert a force against the first male stop  412   a  that causes the first male stop  412   a  to flex toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . This flexure can allow the first male stop  412   a  to fit into the first female stop  416   a . Upon passing by the lip  420 , the first male stop  412   a  can rebound to its neutral position or to a less flexed position and releasably lock the shuttle  14  to the lower jaw via the releasable attachment between the first male stop  412   a  and the first female stop  416   a .  FIGS.  8 A and  8 B  further illustrate that when the shuttle  14  is being translated (e.g., pulled by the upper jaw pusher  86 , pushed by the lower jaw pusher  76 , or both) in a second direction (e.g., opposite the first direction) in the lower jaw track away from the first female stop  416   a , the female surface  418  can exert a force against the first male stop  412   a  that causes the first male stop  412   a  to flex toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . This flexure can allow the first male stop  412   a  to slide under and past the lip  420 . Upon passing by the lip  420  in the second direction, the first male stop  412   a  can rebound to its neutral position (also referred to as a non-flexed position). When the first male stop  412   a  flexes, it can deflect into the first suture hole  404   a.    
       FIGS.  9 A and  9 B  illustrate that when the shuttle  14  is being translated (e.g., pushed by the lower jaw pusher  76 , pulled by the upper jaw pusher  76 , or both) in a first direction in the upper jaw track toward the second female stop  416   b , the lip  420  can exert a force against the second male stop  412   b  that causes the second male stop  412   b  to flex toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . This flexure can allow the second male stop  412   b  to fit into the second female stop  416   b . Upon passing by the lip  420 , the second male stop  412   b  can rebound to its neutral position or to a less flexed position and releasably lock the shuttle  14  to the upper jaw via the releasable attachment between the second male stop  412   b  and the second female stop  416   b .  FIGS.  9 A and  9 B  further illustrate that when the shuttle  14  is being translated (e.g., pushed by the upper jaw pusher  86 , pulled by the lower jaw pusher  76 , or both) in a second direction (e.g., opposite the first direction) in the upper jaw track away from the second female stop  416   b , the female surface  418  can exert a force against the second male stop  412   b  that causes the second male stop  412   b  to flex toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . This flexure can allow the second male stop  412   b  to slide under and past the lip  420 . Upon passing by the lip  420  in the second direction, the second male stop  412   b  can rebound to its neutral position (also referred to as a non-flexed position). When the first male stop  412   a  flexes, it can deflect into the second suture hole  404   b.    
     The lip  420  can resist passage of the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b  along the second direction out of the first and second female stops  416   a ,  416   b  with the threshold release force. The female surface  418  can be an inner surface of the lip  420 . The lip  420  can resist passage of the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b  along the first direction into the first and second female stops  416   a ,  416   b  with the threshold release force or a lesser force (e.g., a force 10% to 75% of the threshold release force). 
     The device  188  can have zero, one, or multiple male stops  412  and zero, one, or multiple female stops  416  on the device distal end  2  (e.g., closer to the jaws than to the handle  104 ) and/or on the device proximal end (e.g., closer to the handle  104  than to the jaws). For example, the upper jaw (e.g., upper jaw  78 ) can have one or multiple male stops  412 , one or multiple female stops  416 , or any combination thereof. The lower jaw (e.g., lower jaw  80 ) can have one or multiple male stops  412 , one or multiple female stops  416 , or any combination thereof. The male and/or female stops  412  and/or  416  can be attached to or integrated with the jaw, the jaw track, or both. The shuttle  14  can have one or multiple male stops  412 , one or multiple female stops  416 , or any combination thereof. The male stops  412  can extend away from and/or toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . The male stops  412  can extend away from and/or toward a longitudinal axis of a jaw track (e.g., tracks  66  and  64 ). The female stops  416  can extend away from and/or toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . The female stops  416  can extend away from and/or toward a longitudinal axis of a jaw track (e.g., tracks  66  and  64 ). 
     For example,  FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the shuttle  14  can have a first male stop  412   a  and a second male stop  412   b , and that the lower and upper jaw tracks (e.g., tracks  66  and  64 ) can each define a female stop  416  (e.g., a first female stop  416   a  in the lower jaw and a second female stop  416   b  in the upper jaw). The lower and upper jaws can each define one or multiple female stops  416 . For example, the first male stop  412   a  can releasably attach to the first female stop  416   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can releasably attach to a second female stop  416   b .  FIG.  8 A  illustrates that the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b  can extend away from a longitudinal axis (e.g., center longitudinal axis) of the shuttle toward a longitudinal center of the shuttle  14 . The first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b  can be the same or a different dimension away from the longitudinal center of the shuttle  14  as the other detent. 
       FIGS.  8 A- 9 B  further illustrate a surface  422  of jaw suture slots  238 , for example, lower jaw suture slot  238   a  and upper jaw suture slot  238   b.    
       FIGS.  8 B and  9 B  illustrate that the shuttle tips  164  can have a shuttle tip thickness  408  of about 0.05 mm to about 0.75 mm, including every 0.05 mm increment within this range (e.g., 0.15 mm, 0.20 mm, 0.25 mm). The shuttle tip thickness  408  can be the width of the non-beveled surfaces  406 . As another example, the shuttle tip thickness  408  can be from about 0.0080 in. to about 0.0090 in. (e.g., 0.0085 in.). 
       FIGS.  8 B and  9 B  further illustrate that the shuttle  14  can have a shuttle thickness  410  (also referred to as the shuttle thickness  14   T ) of about 0.05 mm to about 0.75 mm, including every 0.05 mm increment within this range (e.g., 0.15 mm, 0.20 mm, 0.25 mm). The shuttle tip thickness  408  can be the same or different from the shuttle thickness  410 . The shuttle tip thickness  408  can be less than, equal to, or greater than the shuttle thickness  410 . For example, the shuttle tip thickness  408  can be about 0.15 mm and the shuttle thickness  410  can be about 0.25 mm, or vice versa. 
     The shuttle  14  can be made from a single panel of material (e.g., metal). The suture holes  404  can be cut, leaving the shuttle  14  and the male stops  412 . The shuttle  14  can then be bent, which can result in the male stops  412  extending out of the plane of the shuttle spine  160 . 
       FIGS.  8 A- 9 B  further illustrate that a portion  423  of the shuttle tips  164  can remain exposed outside of the jaws when the shuttle  14  is fully translated into the jaws. The exposed portion  423  can have an exposed length  424 , for example, from about 0.25 mm to about 5.00 mm or more, including every 0.25 mm increment within this range (e.g., 0.50 mm, 1.00 mm, 1.50 mm). The exposed portion  423  can align the lower and upper jaws when they close. The exposed portion  423  can pierce tissue when the lower and upper jaws are closed against each other and before the shuttle  14  is translated to the other jaw. This can advantageously leverage the clamping force of the jaws to cut tissue with the shuttle  14 . A portion of the exposed portion  423  can pierce tissue when the shuttle  14  is translated from the lower jaw to the upper jaw, or vice versa. 
       FIG.  10    illustrates that all or a portion of the exposed portion  423  can be in the other jaw when the lower and upper jaws are closed and before the shuttle  14  is translated to the other jaw via the lower or upper pusher  76 ,  86 . For example, when the jaws are moved from an open configuration to a closed configuration with the exposed portion  423  extending from the upper jaw (e.g., jaw  30 , jaw  78 ) as shown in  FIGS.  8 A and  8 B , the exposed portion  423  can be moved into the lower jaw (e.g., jaw  38 , jaw  80 ) via the jaws closing with or without translation (e.g., simultaneous translation) of the shuttle  14  into the lower jaw via an upper and/or lower pusher while the jaws are being closed. 
       FIG.  10    illustrates that the female stops  416  can have an outer surface  419  and an inner surface  418  (also referred to as a female surface). The outer surface  419  can be flat or curved. The outer surface  419  can define a ramp surface for the male stops  412  to flex against. The outer surface  419  can define a plane at an angle to a longitudinal axis of the shuttle. For example, the plane of the outer surface  419  can be perpendicular or substantially perpendicular to the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle. The inner surface can be flat or curved. The inner surface  418  can define a ramp surface for the male stops  412  to flex against. 
       FIG.  10    illustrates that when the lower and upper jaws are closed the jaws can define a continuous track for the shuttle  14  such the lower jaw track  66  and the upper jaw track  64  are continuous with one another. The tracks of the upper jaw and bottom jaw can form a continuous path when the jaw structure  28  is in a closed configuration. 
       FIG.  10    illustrates that the first jaw tip (e.g., jaw tip  46 , jaw tip  206 ) can be configured to interdigitate with the second jaw tip (e.g., jaw tip  48 , jaw tip  198 ). For example, the first jaw tip can interdigitate with and be adjacent or in contact with the second jaw tip when the jaw structure  28  is in a closed configuration. The jaw tips can be sharpened. The jaw tips can be tapered. The jaw tips can be sharp and seat into each other to form a continuous track when the jaw structure  28  is in a closed configuration. The jaw tips can seat into each other to connect the lower and upper jaw tracks  66 ,  64  to each other. 
       FIG.  11 A  illustrates that the shuttle  14  can have a shuttle first tip  164   a  and a shuttle second tip  164   b.    
       FIG.  11 A  illustrates that the shuttle  14  can have zero, one, or multiple shuttle holes  405 , for example, 1 to 6 or more shuttle holes  405 , including every 1 shuttle hole increment within this range (e.g., 2 shuttle holes, 4 shuttle holes). The shuttle  14  can have a first shuttle hole  405   a  and a second shuttle hole  405   b . The shuttle holes  405  (e.g., holes  405   a  and  405   b ) can be the same as or different from the suture holes  404  (e.g., holes  404   a  and  404   b ). The male and/or female stops  412 ,  416  can move into and out of the shuttle holes  405 , the suture holes  404 , or any combination thereof, for example, via flexing, bending, translating, and/or rotating into and out of the holes  405  and/or  404 . 
       FIG.  11 A  illustrates that the male stops  412  can have one or multiple bends  426 . For example,  FIG.  11 A  illustrates that the male stops  412  can have a first bend  426   a  and a second bend  426   b . The male stops  412  can have inflection points  426   IF  where the curvature of the male stop  412  changes direction or its concavity. For example,  FIG.  11 A  illustrates that the male stops  412  can have an inflection point  426   IF  between two bends  426  (e.g., between the first and second bends  426   a ,  426   b ) where the male stops  412  change concavity (e.g., from concave up for the first bend  426   a  to concave down for the second bend  426   b  as shown in  FIG.  11 A ). 
       FIG.  11 A  illustrates that one or more magnets  428  can be attached to or integrated with the male stops  412  on a first side of the detents, for example, on or under the first surface (also referred to as a male surface). The magnets  428  can be configured to be magnetically attracted to a magnet attached to or integrated with the upper or lower jaw having an opposite dipole as the magnets  428 . 
       FIG.  11 B  illustrates that the one or more magnets  428  can be attached to or integrated with a second surface  415  of the male stops  412 , for example, to an underside of the male stops  412 . 
       FIG.  11 B  illustrates that there can be a gap G on each side of the male stop  412  between the male stop  412  and the shuttle body  160 . The gap G can advantageously inhibit or prevent pressure from forming in the jaws by allowing gas, liquid, or solids to flow or pass through the gap G as the shuttle  14  is advanced into the jaws. There can be a gap on each lateral side of the male stop  412  as shown in  FIG.  11 B . As another example, there may not be any gaps G between the male stops  412  and the shuttle body  160 , or the gap G can be on only one side of the male stop  412  instead of both sides as shown in  FIG.  11 B . The gaps G can have a gap width G w  that can be, for example, constant (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  11 B ) or tapered. As another example, the gaps G can have multiple gap widths G w . For example,  FIG.  11 B  illustrates that the gap G can have a constant width, for example, as measured between the lateral edge or surface of the male stop  412  and the lateral edge or surface of the shuttle body  160 . 
       FIG.  11 B  illustrates that the terminal tips  165  can have a sharpened edge. The sharpened edge can be configured to pierce tissue. 
       FIG.  11 C  illustrates that the male stops  412  (e.g., first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can extend away from a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  out of the plane of the shuttle spine  160 . 
     The shuttle longitudinal axis (e.g., longitudinal axis  157 ) can be flat or curved.  FIG.  11 C  illustrates that the shuttle radius of curvature  154  can be from about 2.00 mm to about 5.00 mm or more, including every 0.01 mm increment within this range (e.g., 2.84 mm). 
     The shuttle  14  can be straight or have a preformed bend or curve (e.g., having the radius of curvature  154 ). The shuttle  14  can have a preformed bend having a radius of curvature of about 40% to about 200% of the radius of curvature  154 , including every 1% increment within this range (e.g., 50%). 
     The curvature of the shuttle  14  can be constant. The curvature of the shuttle  14  can be fixed. The shuttle  14  can be flexible. The shuttle  14  can be rigid. The shuttle  14  can transition between curved and straight configurations. Having a preformed bend within this range can reduce the strain on the shuttle  14 . For example, the strain can be reduced for variations where the shuttle  14  shifts between straight and curved configurations when moving within and/or between the jaws. 
       FIGS.  11 D and  11 E  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second males stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can be radial male stops.  FIGS.  11 D and  11 E  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second males stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can extend radially away from the shuttle  14 .  FIGS.  11 D and  11 E  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second males stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can have a hammerhead shape such that a first end of the males stops can be smaller (e.g., narrower) than a second end of the male stops  412 .  FIGS.  11 D and  11 E  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can be deflectable toward and away a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . For example,  FIGS.  11 D and  11 E  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can be deflectable toward and away from the openings in the shuttle  14  shown in  FIGS.  11 D and  11 E . 
       FIGS.  11 F and  11 G  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second males stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can be lateral male stops.  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second males stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can extend laterally away from the shuttle  14 .  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second males stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can have a hammerhead shape such that a first end of the males stops  412  can be smaller (e.g., narrower) than a second end of the male stops  412 .  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can be deflectable toward and away from a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . For example,  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G  illustrate that the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can be deflectable toward and away from the openings in the shuttle  14  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G . 
     The shuttle  14  can have any combination of the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 G . For example, the shuttle  14  can have 1, 2, 3, or 4 male stops  412 . The shuttle  14  can have any combination of male stops  412 . For example, the shuttle  14  can have any combination of radial male stops (e.g., the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 A-E ) and lateral male stops (e.g., the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G ), including, for example, two radial male stops (e.g., two of the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 E ), two lateral male stops (e.g., the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G ), one radial male stop on a first end of the shuttle  14  and one lateral male stop on a second end of the shuttle  14  (e.g., one of the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 E  and one of the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G ), and two radial male stops and two lateral male stops for a total of four male stops  412  (e.g., two of the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 E  and the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G ). As another example, the shuttle  14  may not have any male stops  412 . 
       FIGS.  12 A and  12 B  illustrate a variation of the device  188  in a fully closed and fully open configuration, respectively. 
       FIGS.  12 A and  12 B  illustrate that the jaw control extension  40  can be fixed and that the jaws  78  and  80  can move relative to the jaw control extension  40 . For example, the jaws  78  and  80  can move distally and proximally against the jaw control extension  40  to open and close, respectively. The jaws  78  and  80  can move longitudinally along a device longitudinal axis  476 . The jaws  78  and  80  can move into and out of the compression cover  34 . The jaws  78  and  80  can be attached to a tube  474  connected to the handle controls that can translate (e.g., slidably translate) the jaws  78  and  80  into and out of the compression cover  34 .  FIGS.  12 A and  12 B  illustrate that the compression cover  34  can engage with an upper jaw surface  79  and a lower jaw surface  81  to force the jaws closed when the jaws  78  and  80  are translated proximally toward the handle and into the compression cover  34 . Movement of the jaws  78  and  80  in a first direction (e.g., distal movement) against the jaw control extension  40  can cause the jaws to open and move from the closed configuration shown in  FIG.  12 A  to the open configuration shown in  FIG.  12 B . Movement of the jaws  78  and  80  in a second direction (e.g., proximal movement) against the compression cover  34  can cause the jaws to close and move from the open configuration shown in  FIG.  12 B  to the closed configuration shown in  FIG.  12 A . The first and second directions can be opposite from one another. As another example, the jaws can be fixed and the jaw control extension can move relative to the jaws. The compression cover  34  can be longitudinally fixed or longitudinally movable. 
     The extension head  254  can have the shape shown such that the jaws open relative to each other when the jaws are moved out of the compression cover  34  over the extension head  254 . 
       FIG.  12 A  illustrates the device  188  without a shuttle  14  for illustrative purposes and  FIG.  12 B  illustrates the device  188  of  FIG.  12 A  with a shuttle  14 . 
       FIGS.  13 A and  13 B  illustrate a variation of the device  188  in a fully opened and fully closed configuration, respectively. 
       FIGS.  13 A and  13 B  illustrate that the handle  104  can have a jaw control  8  (also referred to as a trigger), a jaw control release  478  and a shuttle control  479 . The jaw control  8  can be pulled with one or more fingers in direction  484  to move the jaw control  8  to the configuration shown in  FIG.  13 B . The jaw control  8  can translate and/or rotate. When the jaw control  8  is moved in direction  484 , the jaws  78  and  80  can move from an open configuration to a less open configuration (e.g., to the closed configuration shown in  FIG.  13 B ). When the jaw control  8  is moved in a direction opposite to direction  484 , the jaws  78  and  80  can move from a closed configuration to an open configuration (e.g., from the closed configuration in  FIG.  13 B  to the fully open configuration illustrated in  FIG.  13 A ). 
     As another example, the handle  104  can have a first press button configured to close the jaws when pressed and a second press button configured to open the jaws when pressed. 
     The jaw control release  478  can be a press button, a switch, a knob, or any combination thereof. The jaw control  8  can lock when the jaws  78  and  80  are in the fully closed configuration. Activating the jaw control release  478  can release the jaw control  8  from the lock position. The jaw control release  478  can be activated, for example, by pressing it. Upon pressing the jaw control release  478 , the jaw control  8  can be manually returned to the position shown in  FIG.  13 A  to fully open the jaws, or the jaw control  8  can automatically return to the position shown in  FIG.  13 A . 
     The shuttle control  479  can be a button, switch, knob, or any combination thereof. For example,  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B  illustrate that the shuttle control  479  can be a switch that can pivot. The shuttle control  479  can be locked when the jaws  78  and  80  are in the open configuration of  FIG.  13 A . When the jaws are closed, the shuttle control can be rotated in direction  486  and direction  488 . Directions  486  and  488  can be directed opposite from one another. When the shuttle control  479  is moved in (e.g., rotated) in direction  486 , the upper pusher  86  can move the shuttle  14  to the lower jaw  80 . When the shuttle control  479  is moved in (e.g., rotated) in direction  488 , the lower pusher  76  can move the shuttle  14  to the upper jaw  78 . The shuttle control  479  can have a batwing shape, which can provide ergonomic benefits. 
     As another example, the handle  104  can have a first press button configured to move the upper pusher  86  when pressed and a second press button configured to move the lower pusher  76  when pressed. 
       FIGS.  13 A and  13 B  further illustrate that the device  188  can have a flush port  482  having a luer connection. A cleaning fluid (e.g., enzyme cleaner) can be flushed through the device through the flush port  482  to clean it. 
       FIG.  13 C  illustrates that the shuttle control  479  can have a neutral position. When the shuttle control  479  is in the neutral position, one or neither of the pushers  76  and  86  can be in contact with the shuttle  14 . When the shuttle control  479  is in the neutral position, the shuttle  14  can be ejected from the jaws. 
       FIG.  13 D  illustrates the shuttle control  479  in a fully advanced position when moved in direction  486 . When in the shuttle control  479  is in the fully advanced position in direction  486 , the upper pusher  86  can be in a fully advanced position and the lower pusher  76  can be in a fully retracted position. For example, the upper pusher  86  can be fully advanced toward the lower jaw  80 , thereby pushing the shuttle  14  into the lower jaw  80 . The upper pusher  86  can push the shuttle  14  into the lower jaw  80  to the point where detents on the shuttle  14  (male and/or female stops  412 ,  416 ) releasably engage with detents on the lower jaw  80  (male and/or female stops  412 ,  416 ). 
       FIG.  13 E  illustrates the shuttle control  479  in a fully advanced position when moved in direction  488 . When in the shuttle control  479  is in the fully advanced position in direction  488 , the lower pusher  76  can be in a fully advanced position and the upper pusher  86  can be in a fully retracted position. For example, the lower pusher  76  can be fully advanced toward the upper jaw  78 , thereby pushing the shuttle  14  into the upper jaw  78 . The lower pusher  76  can push the shuttle  14  into the upper jaw  78  to the point where detents on the shuttle  14  (male and/or female stops  412 ,  416 ) releasably engage with detents on the upper jaw  78  (male and/or female stops  412 ,  416 ). 
     The upper and lower jaws referred to throughout the application can be any of the upper and lower jaws disclosed, illustrated, and/or contemplated herein. For example, the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  48  can be the upper and lower jaws  78 ,  80 , respectively. As another example, the upper jaw  30  can be interchangeable with the upper jaw  78 , and the lower jaw  38  can be interchangeable with the upper jaw  80 . As yet another example, the upper jaw  30  can also be referred to as the upper jaw  78 , and the lower jaw  38  can also be referred to as the lower jaw  80 . The lower jaw can be a first jaw and the upper jaw can be a second jaw. The lower jaw can be a second jaw and the upper jaw can be a first jaw. 
     The upper and lower jaw tracks referred to throughout the application can be any of the upper and lower jaw tracks disclosed, illustrated, and/or contemplated herein. For example, the upper and lower jaw tracks  64 ,  66  can be the upper and lower jaw tracks  264 ,  148 , respectively. As another example, the upper jaw track  64  can be interchangeable with the upper jaw track  264 , and the lower jaw track  66  can be interchangeable with the upper jaw track  264 . As yet another example, the upper jaw track  64  can also be referred to as the upper jaw track  264 , and the lower jaw track  66  can also be referred to as the lower jaw track  148 . The lower jaw track can also be referred to as the lower track, and the upper jaw track can also be referred to as the upper track. 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates a variation of a shuttle loader  750  (also referred to as a loader) that can load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 , for example, into the upper jaw  30  or into the lower jaw  38 . The loader  750  can have a loader body  751  that can have a device space  752 . The device  188  can be removably positionable in the device space  752 . When the device  188  is in the device space  752 , the shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188 . The device space  752  can be one or multiple spaces. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the device space  752  can be a recess in the loader body  751 . The spaces can be recesses, grooves, depressions, or available space on the loader  750 .  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the device space  752  can include a first jaw space  752   a  and a second jaw space  752   b . For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the first jaw space  752   a  can be a recess and that the second jaw space  752   b  can be a recess. The upper jaw  30  jaw can be placed in the first jaw space  752   a  and the lower jaw  38  can be placed in the second jaw space  752   b . As another example, the lower jaw  38  jaw can be placed in the first jaw space  752   a  and the upper jaw  30  can be placed in the second jaw space  752   b . The device  188  can be placed in the device space  752  in a partially open configuration or a fully open configuration. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be positionable in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b  when the jaws  30  and  38  are in a fully open configuration. 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can have one or multiple holders  754  that can hold the device  188  and the loader  750  together. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the holders  754  can hold the device  188  in the device space  752 . The holders  754  can be, for example, clips, clasps, magnets, or fasteners, clasps, catches, pins, or any combination thereof. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the holders  754  can be clips that the device  188  can be snapped into when the device  188  is placed in the device space  752 . As another example, the device space  752  can be sized and shaped to form an interference fit (also referred to as a friction fit) with the device  188  when the device  188  is in the device space  752 . For example, the walls of the device space  752 , the holders  754 , or the walls of the device space  752  and the holders  754  can form an interference fit with the device  188  when the device  188  is in the device space  752 . 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can have a loader body shuttle track  756  (also referred to as the shuttle track  756  or the track  756 ). The track  756  can be a track in the loader body  751 . The track  756  can be a groove in the loader body  751 . The track  756  can be a channel in the loader body  751 . The track  756  can have the same radius of curvature as the shuttle  14 . The shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle track  756  or can be positionable in the shuttle track  756 . For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged with the shuttle  14  positioned in the shuttle track  756  in the arrangement shown. 
     The shuttle  14  can be moveable (e.g., translatable, slidable) in the track  756 . The shuttle  14  can be moveable (e.g., longitudinally movable) along the track  756 . For example, the shuttle  14  can be translatable or slidable along the track  756 . The shuttle  14  can be moveable from the track  756  into the device  188 . For example, the shuttle  14  can be moveable out of (e.g., longitudinally out of) the track  756 , for example, into the upper jaw track  64  or into the lower jaw track  66 . The shuttle  14  can be moveable (e.g., translatable, slidable) from the track  756  into the device  188 , into the first jaw space  752   a , into a space above the first jaw space  752   a , or into any combination thereof. The shuttle  14  can be pushable along the track  756 , pullable along the track  756 , or both. The shuttle  14  can be pushable out of the track  756 , pullable out of the track  756 , or both. When the device  188  is attached to the loader  750 , for example, as shown in  FIG.  14 B , the shuttle  14  can be movable into whichever jaw (e.g., the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 ) is in the first jaw space  752   a . When the upper jaw  30  is in the first jaw space  752   a , the shuttle  14  can be moveable from the track  756  to the upper jaw track  64 , for example, by pushing and/or pulling the shuttle  14  from the track  756  to the upper jaw track  64 . When the lower jaw  38  is in the first jaw space  752   a , the shuttle  14  can be moveable from the track  756  to the lower jaw track  66 , for example, by pushing and/or pulling the shuttle  14  from the track  756  to the lower jaw track  66 .  FIGS.  14 A and  14 B  illustrate that the loader  750  can have a loader control  762  that can move the shuttle  14 . The loader control  762  can be movable by the user to load the shuttle  14  from the track  756  into the device  188 . The loader control  762  can be pushable and/or pullable to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . For example,  FIGS.  14 A and  14 B  illustrate that the loader control  762  can be moved to pull the shuttle  14  into the device  188 .  FIGS.  14 A and  14 B  illustrate that the shuttle  14  and the loader control  762  can be releasably connected, for example, via the suture  70 . 
     The shuttle  14  can have a shuttle first position and a shuttle second position. The shuttle first position can be a non-loaded position of the shuttle  14 . The shuttle second position can be a loaded position of the shuttle  14 . The shuttle  14  can be moveable from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position. The shuttle  14  can be moved from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position, for example, in a first direction  763  along the track  756 . The shuttle  14  can be moved from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position to load the device  188  with the shuttle  14 . The shuttle  14  can be moved from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle  14  can be in the track  756 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle  14  can be between the first jaw space  752   a  and the second jaw space  752   b . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle  14  can be in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 , for example, in the upper jaw track  64  or in the lower jaw track  66 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle  14  can be in or above the first jaw space  752   a . For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the shuttle first position can be the position of the shuttle  14  when the shuttle  14  is in the track  756 . The shuttle first position can be the home position (also referred to as the neutral position) of the shuttle  14 . The shuttle first position can be the position of the shuttle  14  before the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . The loader  750  can be packaged with the shuttle  14  in the shuttle first position. As another example, the user can place the shuttle  14  into the shuttle first position. The shuttle second position can be a shuttle loaded position (e.g., a fully loaded position, a partially loaded position) of the shuttle  14  in the device  188 . 
     A fully loaded position of the shuttle  14  can be the position of the shuttle  14  when, for example, the shuttle  14  is in the device  188  (e.g., is in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) and a male stop  412  is engaged with another male stop  412  or with a female stop  416 . If the device  188  does not have any stops, the fully loaded position of the shuttle  14  can be, for example, when the shuttle  14  is in the device  188  (e.g., is in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) to such an extent that the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be closed (e.g., fully closed) with the shuttle  14  in the device  188 . 
     A partially loaded position of the shuttle  14  can be any position of the shuttle  14  between the shuttle first position and a fully loaded position of the shuttle  14 . For example, a partially loaded position of the shuttle  14  can be when the shuttle  14  is in the device  188  (e.g., is in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) but before a male stop is engaged with another male stop  412  or with a female stop  416 . If the device  188  does not have any stops, a partially loaded position of the shuttle  14  can be, for example, when the shuttle  14  is in the device  188  (e.g., is in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) but the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  cannot be closed with the shuttle  14  in the device  188  (e.g., because the shuttle  14  is inhibiting or preventing the jaws  30  and  38  from being closed), or the jaws  30  and  38  can be partially closed but the shuttle  14  prevents the jaws  30  and  38  from being fully closed. 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can have the suture  70 , the suture loop  162 , or both. The suture  70  can be attached to the shuttle  14  or can be attachable to the shuttle  14  with or without the suture loop  162 . For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged with the suture  70  and the suture loop  162  in the arrangement shown, with the suture loop  162  attached to the shuttle  14 . 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can have a cap  758 . The cap  758  can be opaque or transparent. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the cap  758  can be transparent. A transparent cap  758  can advantageously allow the user to observe the loading process, for example, so that the user can see whether or not the shuttle  14  is properly loading into the device  188  during the loading process. A transparent cap  758  can advantageously allow the user to inspect the shuttle  14  prior to loading the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . The cap  758  can keep the shuttle  14  in the shuttle track  756 . The cap  758  can have a cap shuttle track  760  (also referred to as the shuttle track  760  or the track  760 ) that can mate with the shuttle track  756 . A first lateral side of the shuttle  14  can be in the track  756  and a second lateral side of the shuttle  14  can be in the track  760 . The cap  758  can be attached to the loader body  751 , for example, with glue. As another example, the cap  758  can be removably attached to the loader body  751 . The cap  758  can define a portion of the device space  752 . The cap  758  can have a finger  758   F  (also referred to as an extension). The finger  758   F  can constrain or guide movement of the shuttle  14  in the first jaw space  752   a . The finger  758   F  can define a side wall of the first jaw space  752   a . The finger  758   F  can constrain or guide the device  188  when in the first jaw space  752   a . The finger  758   F  can extend around an end (e.g., distal end) of the first jaw space  758   a . As another example, the cap  758  may not have the finger  758   F . 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can have a loader control track  764  (also referred to as the track  764 ) for the loader control  762 . The loader control  762  can be, for example, a moveable button, a moveable knob, a moveable toggle, a moveable switch, a moveable slide, a translator, a rotator, a slider, or any combination thereof. The loader control  762  can have an ergonomic shape, for example, the shape shown in  FIG.  14 A . For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can have a bean shape (e.g., a kidney bean shape) when viewed from a top view. The loader control  762  can be translatable and/or rotatable. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can be a moveable button. The track  764  can be, for example, a track, a channel, a groove, or a through channel of the loader body  751 , or any combination thereof. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the track  764  can extend through the loader body  751 . For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the track  764  can be a slot. 
     The loader control  762  can be moveable (e.g., translatable, slidable) in and/or along the loader control track  764 . The loader control  762  can be moved back and forth along the track  764 . The loader control  762  can have a loader control first position and a loader control second position. The loader control  762  can be moveable from the loader control first position to the loader control second position. The loader control  762  can be moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second position, for example, in a first direction  765  along the track  764 . The loader control first position can be at a first end of the track  764 . The loader control second position can be at the first end of the track  764 , or at a second end of the track  764 . For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader control first position can be at a first terminal end of the track  764 . The loader control first position can be the home position (also referred to as the neutral position or a non-loaded position) of the loader control  762 . The loader  750  can be packaged with the loader control  762  in the loader control first position, with the suture loop  162  attached to the shuttle  14 . The loader control second position can be at a second terminal end of the track  764  or any position along the track  764  between the first and second terminal ends of the track  764 . The loader control second position can be a loader control loaded position (e.g., a fully loaded position, a partially loaded position). For example, the loader control first position can be a non-loaded position of the loader control  762 , the loader control positions between the loader control first and second positions can be loader control partially loaded positions of the loader control  762 , the loader control second position can be a fully loaded position of the loader control  762 , and the loader control positions beyond the loader control second position (e.g., along the track  764  in direction  765 ) can be loader control over-loaded positions of the loader control  762 . The loader control first position can be the position of the loader control  762  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., a non-loaded position). The loader control second position can be the position of the loader control  762  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position (e.g., a fully loaded position). The loader control first position can be the position of the loader control  762  before the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . The loader control second position can be the position of the loader control  762  after the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . 
     A fully loaded position of the loader control  762  can be the position of the loader control  762  when, for example, the shuttle  14  is in the device  188  (e.g., is in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) and a male stop  412  is engaged with another male stop  412  or with a female stop  416 . If the device  188  does not have any stops, the fully loaded position of the loader control  762  can be, for example, when the shuttle  14  is in device  188  (e.g., is in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) to such an extent that the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be closed (e.g., fully closed) with the shuttle  14  in the device  188 . 
     A partially loaded position of the loader control  762  can be any position of the loader control  762  between the loader control first position and a fully loaded position of the loader control  762 . For example, a partially loaded position of the loader control  762  can be when the shuttle  14  is in the device  188  (e.g., is in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) but before a male stop is engaged with another male stop  412  or with a female stop  416 . If the device  188  does not have any stops, a partially loaded position of the loader control  762  can be, for example, when the shuttle  14  is in the device  188  (e.g., is in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) but the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  cannot be closed with the shuttle  14  in the device  188  (e.g., because the shuttle  14  is inhibiting or preventing the jaws  30  and  38  from being closed), or the jaws  30  and  38  can be partially closed but the shuttle  14  prevents the jaws  30  and  38  from being fully closed. 
     The loader control  762  can be moveable from the loader control first position to the loader control second position to move the shuttle  14  into the device  188 , for example, to move the shuttle  14  from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position. To load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 , the loader control  762  can be moved (e.g., pushed, pulled, pushed and pulled) from the loader control first position to the loader control second position or to a loader control third position beyond the loader control second position. The loader control third position can be any position beyond the loader control second position, and can include, for example, the position of the loader control  762  at the second terminal end of the track  764 . 
     When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle first position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle second position. The shuttle second position can be a loaded position of the shuttle  14  in the device. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle second position or in a shuttle third position. The shuttle third position can be an overloaded position of the shuttle  14  in the device  188 . The shuttle second and third positions can both be fully loaded positions of the shuttle  14 . For example, one of the male stops  412  (e.g., the leading male stop  412 , which can be the male stop  412  that is loaded the farthest into the device  188  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second and third positions) can be engaged with another male stop  412  or with a female stop  416  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position. The user can choose to load the shuttle  14  to the shuttle second position or to the shuttle third position. The device  188  can be considered loaded with the shuttle  14  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position. The device  188  can be considered loaded with the shuttle  14  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position. For example, the device  188  can be removed from the loader  750  when the device  188  is in a device loaded configuration. The device  188  can have the device loaded configuration when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position or when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position. 
     When the device  188  is in the device loaded configuration and the device  188  is detached from the loader  750 , the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be closed, and the shuttle  14  can be passed from the upper jaw  30  to the lower jaw  38  or vice versa. 
     For example, when the device  188  is in the device loaded configuration with the shuttle in the shuttle second position in the upper jaw  30 , the device  188  can detached from the loader  750 , the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be closed, and the shuttle  14  can be passed from the upper jaw  30  to the lower jaw  38 , for example, by moving (e.g., pushing) the shuttle  14  from the shuttle second position in the upper jaw  30  to a position in the lower jaw  38 . 
     For example, when the device  188  is in the device loaded configuration with the shuttle in the shuttle third position in the upper jaw  30 , the device  188  can detached from the loader  750 , the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be closed, and the shuttle  14  can be passed from the upper jaw  30  to the lower jaw  38 , for example, by moving (e.g., pushing) the shuttle  14  from the shuttle third position in the upper jaw  30  to a position in the lower jaw  38 . 
     For example, when the device  188  is in the device loaded configuration with the shuttle in the shuttle second position in the lower jaw  38 , the device  188  can detached from the loader  750 , the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be closed, and the shuttle  14  can be passed from the lower jaw  38  to the upper jaw  30 , for example, by moving (e.g., pushing) the shuttle  14  from the shuttle second position in the lower jaw  38  to a position in the upper jaw  30 . 
     For example, when the device  188  is in the device loaded configuration with the shuttle in the shuttle third position in the lower jaw  38 , the device  188  can detached from the loader  750 , the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be closed, and the shuttle  14  can be passed from the lower jaw  38  to the upper jaw  38 , for example, by moving (e.g., pushing) the shuttle  14  from the shuttle third position in the lower jaw  38  to a position in the upper jaw  30 . 
     As another example, the device  188  can be removed from the loader  750  once the shuttle  14  is unloaded from the device  188  (e.g., from the shuttle second or third position) to the shuttle first position onto the loader  750  (e.g., into the track  756 ). 
     Moving the loader control  762  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position can move the shuttle  14  from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position or can cause the shuttle  14  to move from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position. For example, when the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second position, the loader control  762  can pull the suture  70  which can in turn pull the shuttle  14 . As the loader control  762  is moved in the first direction  765 , for example, from the loader control first position to the loader control second position, the suture  70  between the shuttle  14  and the loader control  762  can be in tension. In this way the loader control  762  can move the shuttle  14  by moving the suture  70 . As another example, the loader control  762  can be directly attached (e.g., directly removably attached) to the shuttle  14 . As yet another example, the loader control  762  can be the suture  70  itself. For example, the user can pull on the suture  70  to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . 
     As the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  can be moved along the loader body shuttle track  756 , along the cap shuttle track  760 , along the first jaw space  752   a , along a jaw track (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ), or any combination thereof. For example, when the loader  750  is used to load the upper jaw  30  with the shuttle  14 , the shuttle  14  can be moved along the loader body shuttle track  756  and the cap shuttle track  760  into the upper jaw track  64 . When the shuttle  14  is in the upper jaw track  64 , the shuttle can be in or above the first jaw space  752   a . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position in the upper jaw  30 , the loader control  762  can be in the loader control second position and the shuttle  14  can be fully loaded into the upper jaw track  64  (e.g., the shuttle  14  can be in a fully loaded position in the upper jaw track  64 ). As another example, when the loader  750  is used to load the lower jaw  38  with the shuttle  14 , the shuttle  14  can be moved along the loader body shuttle track  756  and the cap shuttle track  760  into the lower jaw track  66 . When the shuttle  14  is in the lower jaw track  66 , the shuttle can be in or above the first jaw space  752   a . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position in the lower jaw  38 , the loader control  762  can be in the loader control second position and the shuttle  14  can be fully loaded into the lower jaw track  66  (e.g., the shuttle  14  can be in a fully loaded position in the upper jaw track  64 ). 
     When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  can be fully loaded into the device  188 . Once the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the loader control  762  can be moveable to the loader control third position, for example, to help make sure the shuttle  14  is fully loaded into the device  188  by the loader control  762  and/or to let the user know that the shuttle  14  is fully loaded into the device  188 . As the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position, the shuttle  14  may or may not move farther into the device  188  (e.g., into the upper jaw  30  or into the lower jaw  38 ), for example, into the shuttle third position. In both cases, when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position and the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position fully loaded into the device  188 , moving the loader control  762  to the loader control third position can cause the loader  750  to provide tactile and/or audible feedback to the user (e.g., audible clicks, movement of the suture  70  through or around the loader control  762 , an audible slipping sound as the suture  70  is pulled through or around the loader control  762 ) which can indicate that the shuttle  14  is fully loaded into the device  188 . The loader control  762  can be moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position to overload the shuttle  14  into the device. In such cases, as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position, the shuttle  14  can move farther into the device  188  (e.g., into the upper jaw  30  or into the lower jaw  38 ) to overload the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . This can advantageously prevent or inhibit the male stop  412  of the shuttle  14  from getting locked or jammed with the female stop  416  in the jaw by creating a gap between the distal edge of the female stop  416  (e.g., the edge of the female stop  416  closest to the tip of the jaw) and the distal edge of the male stop  412  of the shuttle  14  that is in the female stop  416 . 
     The loader control  762  can be moveable along the track  764  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position in discrete steps (e.g., stopping at one or more intermediate positions between the loader control first and second positions) and/or in one continuous movement, for example, in direction  765  (e.g., the direction toward the second terminal end of the track  764  along the track  764 , for example, the direction along the track  764  from the first terminal end of the track  764  to the second terminal end of the track  764 ). The loader control  762  can be moved along the track  764  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position in discrete steps (e.g., stopping at one or more intermediate positions between the loader control first and second positions) and/or in one continuous movement, for example, in direction  765  (e.g., the direction toward the second terminal end of the track  764  along the track  764 , for example, the direction along the track  764  from the first terminal end of the track  764  to the second terminal end of the track  764 ). 
     The loader control  762  can be moveable along the track  764  from the loader control first position to the loader control third position in discrete steps (e.g., stopping at one or more intermediate positions between the loader control first and second positions and/or stopping at one or more intermediate positions between the loader control second and third positions) and/or in one continuous movement, for example, in direction  765  (the direction along the track from the first terminal end of the track  764  to the second terminal end of the track  764 ). The loader control  762  can be moved along the track  764  from the loader control first position to the loader control third position in discrete steps (e.g., stopping at one or more intermediate positions between the loader control first and second positions and/or stopping at one or more intermediate positions between the loader control second and third positions) and/or in one continuous movement, for example, in direction  765  (the direction along the track from the first terminal end of the track  764  to the second terminal end of the track  764 ). 
     The loader control  762  can be moveable along the track  764  in a direction opposite to direction  765  (e.g., the direction toward the first terminal end of the track  764  along the track  764 , for example, the direction along the track  764  from the second terminal end of the track  764  to the first terminal end of the track  764 ). The loader control  762  can be moved toward the first terminal end of the track  764 , for example, to partially or fully unload the shuttle  14  from the device  188  back into the track  756 . The shuttle  14  can be partially or fully unloaded from the upper jaw  30  or from the lower jaw  38 , for example, if there was an error or malfunction during loading such as the shuttle  14  being misaligned with the upper or lower jaw  30 ,  38  or such as the suture  70  breaking or prematurely slipping through the loader control  762 . As another example, the shuttle  14  can be partially or fully unloaded from the device  188  if when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position or in the loader control third position, the shuttle  14  is in a partially loaded position between the shuttle first and second positions. Once the shuttle  14  is partially or fully unloaded from the device  188  by moving the loader control  762  in toward the first terminal end of the track  764  (e.g., in a direction opposite to direction  765 ), the shuttle  14  can be loaded or reloaded into the device with or without making adjustments to the loader  750  and/or the device  188 . For example, after the shuttle  14  is unloaded from the device  188 , the positions of the suture  70  and/or the shuttle  14  can be repositioned, as needed, so that the loader control  762  can load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . For example, if a portion of the suture  70  is extending across the track  756  after the shuttle is unloaded, the suture  70  can be moved away from the track  756  so that the suture  70  does not block or inhibit the shuttle  14  from moving along the track  756  and into the device  188  as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second position. 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can have a suture holder  766 . The suture holder  766  can be, for example, a suture spool. The suture  70  can have a length of about 3 cm to about 150 cm, including every 1 cm increment within this range (e.g., 3 cm, 4 cm, 40 cm, 150 cm). The suture holder  766  may or may not hold suture, depending on the length of the suture. For example, where the suture holder  766  is a suture spool, the suture holder  766  may or may not have suture  70  wound around it. The loader  750  can be packaged with any length of suture. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged with a suture  70  having a length of 4 cm. For a suture length of 4 cm, the suture holder  766  may or may not hold any of the suture  70 . As another example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged with a suture  70  having a length of 40 cm. For a suture length of 40 cm, the suture holder  766  can hold some of the suture  70  (e.g., where the suture holder  766  is a spool, some of the suture  70  can be wound around the suture holder  766 ). As the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 , for example, by moving the loader control  762  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position, the suture  70  on the suture holder  766  can be pulled from the suture holder  766 . When the suture  70  is pulled from the suture holder  766 , the suture  70  can, for example, unwind or unfold from the suture holder  766 . As the suture  70  is pulled from the suture holder  766 , the suture holder  766  can spin or rotate as the suture  70  is unwound from the suture holder  766 .  FIG.  14 A  illustrates, for example, that the suture holder  766  can be seen through holes (e.g., three holes) in the loader body  751 . 
     The suture  70  can be a first suture. A first end of the suture  70  can be connected to the shuttle  14  (e.g., via the suture loop  162 ) and a second end of the suture  70  can be connected to a second suture, for example, to an implantable suture. The second end of the suture  70  can have a loop that can be attachable to the second suture. The first suture and/or the second suture can be removably attachable to the loader control  762 . 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the cap  758  can be on a first side of the loader  750  and that the suture holder  766  can be on a second side of the loader  750 . The first and second sides of the loader  750  can be opposite to each other. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the cap can be on a front side of the loader  750  and that the suture holder  766  can be on the back side of the loader  750 . 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the suture  70  can extend from the shuttle  14  under the cap  758  to the loader control  762 , can extend through the loader control  762  from a first side of the loader  750  to a second side of the loader  750 , and can extend from the loader control  762  to the suture holder  766 . As another example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the suture  70  can extend from the shuttle  14  under the cap  758  to the loader control  762 , can extend through the loader control  762 , can extend around the loader control  762 , can extend from the first side of the loader  750  to the second side of the loader  750  (e.g., around the outside of the loader  750  or through the track  764 ), can extend to the suture holder  766 , or any combination thereof. 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the device  188  can be placed in the device space  752  with the upper jaw  30  in the first jaw space  752   a  with the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  in an open configuration (e.g., in a partially open configuration or in a fully open configuration). For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be positionable in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa), when the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are in a fully open configuration. 
     When the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are positioned in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa), the shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  with or without closing or clamping the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  against the cap  758 . For example, when the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are positioned in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa), the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be closeable against the cap  758 . For example, when the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are positioned in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa) in an open configuration, the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be partially closed against the cap  758 , for example, by moving the jaw control  8  in direction  484  (e.g., by pulling the jaw control  8 ). When the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are partially closed against the cap  758 , the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be clamped against the cap  758 . Closing the jaws against the cap  758  can advantageously stabilize the device  188  in the device space  752 . Closing the jaws against the cap  758  can advantageously align the shuttle  14  with the jaw track that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ). As another example, when the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are positioned in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa), the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be clampable against the cap  758 . For example, when the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are positioned in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa) in an open configuration, the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be clamped against the cap  758  by moving the jaws into a partially closed configuration (e.g., by moving the jaw control  8  in direction  484 ). Clamping the jaws against the cap  758  can advantageously stabilize the device in the device space  752 . Clamping the jaws against the cap  758  can advantageously align the shuttle  14  with the jaw track that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ). As another example, when the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are positioned in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa), the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be closeable or clampable against the cap  758  but closing or clamping the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  against the cap  758  may not be necessary to stabilize the device  188  or to align the shuttle  14  with the jaw track that is in the first jaw space  752   a  before loading the shuttle  14  into the device  188 , as the fit of the device  188  in the device space  752  can stabilize the device  188  and can align the shuttle  14  with the jaw track that is in the first jaw space  752   a . As yet another example, when the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are positioned in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa), the fit of the device  188  in the device space  752  can be such that the upper jaw  30  and/or lower jaw  38  cannot be closed or clamped against the cap  758  as there may not be space for the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  to move in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b.    
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., in the position shown in  FIG.  14 A ), a portion  768  (also referred to as the exposed portion  768 ) of one of the shuttle tips  164  can extend from the cap  758 . The portion  768  can be the portion of the shuttle  14  that extends out from under the cap  758  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position. The portion  768  can remain exposed outside of the cap  758  when the shuttle is in the shuttle first position. The exposed portion  768  can have an exposed length  768   L , for example, from about 0.15 mm to about 5.00 mm or more, including every 0.25 mm increment within this range (e.g., 0.15 mm, 1.00 mm, 1.50 mm, 5.00 mm). As another example, the exposed length  768   L  can be the same as the exposed length  424 . 
     When the jaws are in a partially closed configuration (e.g., with or without being clamped against the cap  758 ), all or a portion of the exposed portion  768  may not be in the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 ). As another example, as the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are partially closed against the cap  758 , the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 ) can close onto all or a portion of the exposed portion  768 . The exposed portion  768  can align the jaw (e.g., the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 ) in the first jaw space  752   a  during loading, for example, as the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  closes onto the exposed portion  768 . For example, the device  188  can be placed in the device space  752  with the upper jaw  30  in the first jaw space  752   a  with the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  in an open configuration (e.g., in a partially open configuration or in a fully open configuration). When the jaws are in a partially closed configuration against the cap  758 , all or a portion of the exposed portion  768  can be in the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 ). When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position and the jaws are closed against the cap  758 , all or a portion of the exposed portion  768  can be in the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 ). The exposed portion  768  can align the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  as the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are closed together against the cap  758 . This can advantageously leverage the clamping force of the jaws to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188  (e.g., into the upper jaw  30  or into the lower jaw  38 ). When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the portion  423  of the shuttle tip  164  can remain exposed outside of the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a . In this way, a first side of the shuttle  14  can have the exposed portion  768  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, and a second side of the shuttle  14  can have the exposed portion  423  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position. As another example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position and the jaws are closed against the cap  758  and/or against the loader body  751 , all or a portion of the exposed portion  768  can be outside of the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 ). For example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position and the jaws are closed against the cap  758  and/or against the loader body  751 , all or a portion of the exposed portion  768  can be in the track  756  and/or in the track  760 . As another example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position and the jaws are closed against the cap  758  and/or the loader body  751 , a first portion of the exposed portion  768  can be in the track  756  and/or in the track  760 , and a second portion of the exposed portion  768  can be in (e.g., can extend into) the first jaw space  752  with or without also extending into the device  188 . As the jaws are closed against the cap  758  and/or against the loader body  751 , the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38  may or may not close onto the shuttle  14  (e.g., onto the exposed portion  768 ). In either case (e.g., the shuttle  14  is in the jaws when the jaws are clamped against cap  758  and/or the loader body  751 , or the shuttle  14  is not in the jaws when the jaws are clamped against the cap  758  and/or the loader body  751 ), closing the jaws onto the cap  758  and/or onto the loader  750  can advantageously leverage the clamping force of the jaws to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188  (e.g., into the upper jaw  30  or into the lower jaw  38 ), for example, by stabilizing the device  188  in or on the loader  750 . The shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device from the track  756  and/or from the track  760  with or without clamping the jaws onto the cap  758  and/or onto the loader body  751 . 
     The shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  with or without closing the jaws against the cap  758 . 
     The first jaw space  752   a  and/or the second jaw space  752   b  can be sized and shaped to form an interference fit (also referred to as a friction fit) with the upper jaw  30  and/or the lower jaw  38  when the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  are in the device spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa). When the first jaw space  752   a  is sized and shaped to form an interference fit with the jaw positioned in the first jaw space  752   a , the first jaw space  752   a  can advantageously stabilize the device  188  on the loader  750  by stabilizing the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  and can advantageously align the shuttle  14  with the jaw track that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ). 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can have a luer cap holder  770  that a luer cap (e.g., shown in  FIG.  14 B ) can be removably secured to. The luer cap holder  770  can be a recess or a hole in the loader body  751 . For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the luer cap holder  770  can be a hole in the loader body  751 . 
       FIG.  14 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can have a loader length  750   L . The loader length  750   L  can be, for example, about 2.50 in. to about 5.00 in., including every 0.01 in. increment within this range (e.g., 2.50 in., 3.00 in., 3.50 in., 5.00 in.). 
       FIG.  14 B  illustrates that the device  188  can be placed in the device space  752 . The device  188  can be removably attached to the loader  750  in the arrangement shown, with the upper jaw  30  in the first jaw space  752   a  and the lower jaw  38  in the second jaw space  752   b , or vice versa. For example,  FIG.  14 B  illustrates that the loader  750  can be used to load the upper jaw  30  with the shuttle  14 . When the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  can be moved into the upper jaw  30 , for example, from outside the upper jaw  30  in the shuttle first position to inside the upper jaw  30  in the shuttle second position. 
       FIG.  14 B  illustrates the device  188  attached to the loader  750  before the jaws are closed against the cap  758 . As another example,  FIG.  14 B  illustrates the shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  without closing the jaws against the cap  758 . Before the jaws are closed against the cap  758 , the jaws can float in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b  and may or may not make contact with the cap  758 . For example,  FIG.  14 B  illustrates the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  floating in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , respectively (or vice versa), with the upper jaw  30  in contact with the cap  758  and with the lower jaw  38  not in contact with the cap  758 . When the jaws are closed against the cap  758 , the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be in contact with the cap  758 . When the jaws are closed against the cap  758 , the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  can be clamped against the cap  758 . When the jaws are closed against the cap  758 , the jaws may not float in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b . The shuttle  14  can be loadable into the device  188  before or after clamping the jaws against the cap  758  such that the shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  with or without the jaws floating in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b.    
       FIG.  14 B  illustrates that when the jaws are in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , the exposed portion  768  may not be in the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a.    
       FIG.  14 B  illustrates that the luer cap  772  can be removably attached to the luer cap holder  770 . 
       FIG.  14 B  illustrates that the device  188  can be removably attached to the loader  750  via the holders  754 . For example,  FIG.  14 B  illustrates that the holders  754  can be removably attached the compression cover  34  of the device  188 . As another example,  FIG.  14 B  illustrates that the compression cover  34  of the device  188  can be removably attached to the holders  754 .  FIG.  14 B  illustrates that the holders  754  can be clips and that the device  188  can be snapped into the clips to removably secure the device  188  to the loader  750  during loading and/or unloading. 
       FIG.  14 B  illustrates that the cap  758  can be opaque. 
       FIG.  14 C  illustrates that the cap  758  illustrated in  FIG.  14 B  can be transparent, showing the shuttle  14 , the suture loop  162 , and the suture  70  under the cap  758 . 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the loader  750  can have loading instructions  774 . The loading instructions  774  can include, for example, a loading instruction first step  774   a , a loading instruction second step  774   b , and a loading instruction third step  774   c . Each loading instruction step (e.g., loading instruction first, second, and third steps  774   a ,  774   b ,  774   c ) can include one or multiple instructions. 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that when the upper jaw  30  is to be loaded with the shuttle  14 , the loading instruction first step  774   a  can include, for example, opening the jaws, moving the upper jaw pusher  86  to a fully retracted position, and placing the upper jaw  30  is in the first jaw space  752   a  and the lower jaw  38  is in the second jaw space  752   b , or any combination thereof. For example, when the upper jaw  30  is to be loaded with the shuttle  14 , the loading instruction first step  774   a  can include an instruction to load the device  188  onto the loader  750  with the trigger arrangement shown (e.g., with the jaw control  8  and the shuttle control  479  in the positions shown). As another example, the loading instruction first step  774   a  can include an instruction to move the jaw control  8  in direction  485  (e.g., which can be opposite to direction  484 ) to move the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  into an open configuration (e.g., into a fully open configuration), can include an instruction to move the shuttle control  479  to the fully advanced position in direction  488  to position the lower jaw pusher  76  in a fully advanced position and the upper jaw pusher  86  in a fully retracted position, or can include both instructions. 
     As another example, when the lower jaw  38  is to be loaded with the shuttle  14 , the loading instruction first step  774   a  can include, for example, opening the jaws, moving the lower jaw pusher  76  to a fully retracted position, and placing the lower jaw  38  is in the first jaw space  752   a  and the upper jaw  30  is in the second jaw space  752   b , or any combination thereof. For example, when the lower jaw  38  is to be loaded with the shuttle  14 , the loading instruction first step  774   a  can include an instruction to load the device  188  onto the loader  750  with the jaw control  8  in the position shown in  FIG.  14 D  and with the shuttle control  479  in the position shown, for example, in  FIG.  13 D ). For example, the loading instruction first step  774   a  can include an instruction to move the jaw control  8  in direction  485  (e.g., which can be opposite to direction  484 ) to move the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  into an open configuration (e.g., into a fully open configuration), can include an instruction to move the shuttle control  479  to the fully advanced position in direction  486  (e.g., see  FIG.  13 D ) to position the upper jaw pusher  86  in a fully advanced position and the lower jaw pusher  86  in a fully retracted position, or can include both instructions. 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the loading instruction second step  774   b  can include moving the loader control  762  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position to move the shuttle  14  from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position. 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the loading instruction third step  774   c  can include removing the device  188  from the loader  750 . 
     As another example, the loading instructions  774  can include a loading instruction step between the loading instruction first and second steps  774   a ,  774   b  that includes an instruction to close or clamp the jaws against the cap  758  by moving the jaw control in direction  484 . 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the loader control track  764  can have the arrangement shown. The loader control  762  is shown transparent for illustrative purposes only, for example, to show the portion of the loader control track  764  under the loader control  762 . As another example, the loader control  762  can be transparent. A transparent loader control  762  can advantageously allow the user to observe the suture  70  in the loader control  762 , for example, so that the user can see whether or not the loader control  762  is properly pulling the suture  70  during the loading process. A transparent loader control  762  can advantageously allow the user to inspect the loader control  762  to verify that the suture  70  is properly positioned in the loader control  762  prior to loading the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged without the suture  70  or the suture loop  162  attached to the shuttle  14 .  FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the suture  70  or the suture loop  162  can be attached to the shuttle  14  in the arrangement shown, and that the suture  70  can be attached to or passed through the loader control  762  in the arrangement shown. 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the shuttle  14  can be fully under the cap  758 , for example, such that the shuttle  14  does not have the portion  768  extending out from under the cap  758  when the shuttle is in the shuttle first position (e.g., the position of the shuttle  14  in  FIG.  14 D ). 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the luer cap  772  can be covered by the loading instructions  774 . The loading instructions  774  can indicate the location of the luer cap  772 . For example,  FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the luer cap  772  is under “LUER CAP” on the loading instructions  774 . To remove the luer cap  772  from the loader  750 , the loading instructions  774  (e.g., the portion of the loading instructions  774  having the loading instruction second and third steps  774   b ,  774   c ) can be removed from the loader  750  (e.g., like a pull tab). As another example, to remove the luer cap  772  from the loader  750 , the luer cap  772  can be pushed through the portion of the loading instructions  774  that cover the luer cap  772 . Pushing the luer cap  772  through the loading instructions  774  can tear the loading instructions  774 . As yet another example, to remove the luer cap  772  from the loader  750 , the luer cap  772  can be removed from the back side of the loader  750  without having to remove or tear through the loading instructions  774 . 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the loader control  762  can have a loader control first side  762   FS  and a loader control second side  762   SS . The loader control first side  762   FS  can be on a first side of the loader  750  and the loader control second side  762   SS  can be on a second side of the loader  750 . For example,  FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the loader control first side  762   FS  can be on a front side of the loader  750  and that the loader control second side  762   SS  can be on the back side of the loader  750 . As shown in  FIG.  14 D , the loader control  762  can extend through the track  764 . 
       FIGS.  14 C and  14 D  illustrate that the loader control  762  can releasably hold the suture  70 . The loader control  762  can have or can be, for example, a suture holder  795 . The suture holder  795  can be a loader control suture holder. The suture holder  795  can have the loader control first side  762   FS  and the loader control second side  762   SS . For example, the loader control first side  762   FS  can be moveable (e.g., squeezable) toward and away from the loader control second side  762   SS  to releasably hold and release the suture  70 , respectively. A portion of the loader control first side  762   FS  can be moveable toward and away from the loader control second side  762   SS , for example, to releasably hold and release the suture  70 , respectively. A portion of the loader control second side  762   SS  can be moveable toward and away from the loader control first side  762   FS , for example, to releasably hold and release the suture  70 , respectively. 
     The suture holder  795  can releasably hold or lock the suture  70  in the loader control  762  as shuttle  14  is loaded and/or unloaded from the device  188 . For example, the suture holder  795  can releasably hold or releasably lock the suture  70  in the loader control  762  as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second or third position. The loader control first side  762   FS  can be moved into (e.g., pushed into, pressed against) the loader control second side  762   SS  to releasably hold the suture  70  in the loader control  762 . The loader control first side  762   FS  can be moved away from or depressed from the loader control second side  762   SS  to release the suture  70  from the loader control  762 . For example, when the loader control first side  762   FS  and the loader control second side  762   SS  are pressed together, the suture  70  can be releasably held by the loader control  762  as the loader control  762  is moved in direction  765  (e.g., from the loader control first position to the loader control second or third position) or in the direction opposite to direction  765  (e.g., from the loader control second or third position to the loader control first position). When the suture  70  is releasably held by the loader control  762 , the shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  via the loader control  762  pulling the shuttle  14  into the device  188  by pulling on the suture  70  as the loader control  762  is moved in direction  765 . When the suture  70  is releasably held by the loader control  762 , the shuttle  14  can be unloaded from the device  188  via the loader control  762  pulling the shuttle  14  out of the device  188  by pulling on the suture  70  as the loader control  762  is moved in the direction opposite to direction  765 . 
     The suture holder  795  can advantageously inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from slipping through the loader control  762  as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second position. For example, the suture holder  795  can prevent the suture  70  from sliding through the suture holder  795  in the loader control  762  until a loader control threshold force is reached or exceeded. When the loader control threshold force is reached or exceeded, the suture  70  can slip or slide through the suture holder  795  in the loader control  762 . In this way the suture holder  795  can advantageously inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from breaking or fraying, allowing the suture to slip or slide through the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  pulls the suture  70  and the shuttle  14  with a force equal to or greater than the loader control threshold force. The loader control threshold force can advantageously inhibit or prevent the integrity of the suture  70  from breaking or becoming damaged during the loading process. The suture holder  795  can advantageously allow the loader control  762  to pull on the suture  70  to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 , to unload the shuttle  14  from the device  188 , or both. The loader control threshold force can be, for example, from about 2.00 lbs to about 10.00 lbs, including every 0.01 lb increment within this range (e.g., 2.00 lbs, 3.00 lbs, 6.00 lbs, 10.00 lbs). The loader control threshold force can be higher than the loading force needed for loading the shuttle  14  into the device  188  or the unloading force need for unloading the shuttle  14  from the device  188 . For example, the loading force can be about 0.30 lbs to about 4.00 lbs, including every 0.01 lb increment within this range (e.g., 0.30 lbs, 0.50 lbs, 2.00 lbs, 4.00 lbs). For example, the unloading force can be about 0.30 lbs to about 4.00 lbs, including every 0.01 lb increment within this range (e.g., 0.30 lbs, 0.50 lbs, 2.00 lbs, 4.00 lbs). 
       FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the loader control  762  can have one or multiple loader control suture tracks  775  (also referred to as the tracks  775 ) that the suture  70  can be positionable in and/or that the suture  70  can be moveable in. The suture  70  can move (e.g., slide, translate) in the tracks  775 , for example, as the suture  70  is pulled through the loader control  762 . The tracks  775  can be one or multiple grooves or channels in the loader control  762 . For example,  FIG.  14 D  illustrates that the loader control first side  762   FS  can have a track  775  and that the loader control second side  762   SS  can have a track  775 . The tracks  775  can advantageously keep the suture  70  at or below a surface of the loader control  762  so that the suture is not damaged by the user (e.g., via pulling, twisting, or rolling the suture  70 ) as user moves the loader control  762  from the loader control first position to the loader control second or third position. 
       FIG.  14 E  illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged with the suture  70  attached to the shuttle  14 , for example, via the suture loop  162 . Half of the upper jaw  30  in  FIG.  14 E  is shown transparent for illustrative purposes only, for example, so that the relationship between the upper and lower jaw tracks  64 ,  66  and the shuttle  14  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position can be more easily seen. 
       FIG.  14 E  illustrates that when the jaws are in the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b , the exposed portion  768  can be aligned with the shuttle track of the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a . For example,  FIG.  14 E  illustrates that when the upper jaw  30  is in the first jaw space  752   a , the shuttle tip  164  can be aligned with the upper jaw track  64  such that the shuttle  14  can be loaded into the upper jaw  30  when the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second or third position. As another example, example, when the lower jaw  38  is in the first jaw space  752   a , the shuttle tip  164  can be aligned with the lower jaw track  66  such that the shuttle  14  can be loaded into the lower jaw when the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second or third position. 
       FIG.  14 E  illustrates, for example, that the loader  750  can have a loader body suture track  776  (also referred to as the suture track  776  or the track  776 ). The track  776  can be a track in the loader body  751 . The track  776  can be a groove in the loader body  751 . The track  776  can be a channel in the loader body  751 . The track  776  can be a ledge. For example,  FIG.  14 E  illustrates that the track  776  can be a ledge. The track  776  can be parallel to the track  756 . The track  776  can have a radius of curvature greater than, less than, or equal to the radius of curvature of the shuttle  14 . The track  776  can have a radius of curvature greater than, less than, or equal to the radius of curvature of the track  756 . The suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can be in the track  776  or can be positionable in the track  776 . For example,  FIG.  14 E  illustrates that the suture loop  162  can be in the track or can be positionable in the track  776 . For example,  FIG.  14 E  illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged with the suture loop  162  attached to the shuttle  14  and positioned in the track  776  in the arrangement shown, for example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position and the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position. 
     The suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can be moveable (e.g., translatable, slidable) in the track  776 . The suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can be longitudinally moveable along the track  776 . For example, the suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can be translatable or slidable along the track  776 . The suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can be moveable out of (e.g., longitudinally out of) the track  776 , for example, into the upper jaw track  64  and/or into the upper jaw suture slot  238   b . The suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can be moveable out of (e.g., longitudinally out of) the track  776 , for example, into the lower jaw track  66  and/or into the lower jaw suture slot  238   a . For example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position,  FIG.  14 E  illustrates that the shuttle  14  can be in the track  756  and that the suture loop  162  can be in the track  776 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position and has been loaded into the upper jaw  30 , the shuttle  14  can be in the upper jaw  30 , and the suture loop  162  can be in the upper jaw track  64  and/or in the upper jaw suture slot  238   b . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position and has been loaded into the lower jaw  38 , the shuttle  14  can be in the lower jaw  38 , and the suture loop  162  can be in the lower jaw track  66  and/or in the lower jaw suture slot  238   a . The suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can be movable in the track  776  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  in direction  763 . The suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can be movable in the track  776  as the shuttle  14  is unloaded from the device  188  in a direction opposite to direction  763 . 
       FIG.  14 E  illustrates that the loader body  751  can have a loader body surface  778  (also referred to as the surface  778 ). The surface  778  can form an edge of the track  776 . The surface  778  can form an edge of the first jaw space  752   a . The surface  778  can form an edge of the second jaw space  752   b . For example,  FIG.  14 E  illustrates that the surface  778  can abut or form the edge of the first and second jaw spaces  752   a ,  752   b .  FIG.  14 E  illustrates that the male stops  412  on the shuttle  14 , the suture loop  162 , and the suture  70  can extend over the surface  778 . In this way, the face of the loader  750  (e.g., the surface  778 ) can be a track over which the male stops  412  on the shuttle  14 , the suture loop  162 , and the suture  70  can extend. As another example, lateral male stops (e.g., the lateral male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G ) may not extend over the surface  778 . The male stops  412  on the shuttle  14 , the suture loop  162 , and the suture  70  can be moveable across the surface  778 , for example, as the shuttle  14  is moved from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position. The male stops  412  on the shuttle  14 , the suture loop  162 , and/or the suture  70  may or may not contact the surface  778 . For example, as the shuttle  14  is moved from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position, the male stops  412  on the shuttle  14 , the suture loop  162 , and/or the suture  70  may or may not contact the surface  778 . For example,  FIG.  14 E  illustrates that as the shuttle  14  is moved from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position, the male stops  412  on the shuttle  14 , the suture loop  162 , and/or the suture  70  can extend over the surface  778  without contacting the surface  778  as the male stops  412  on the shuttle  14 , the suture loop  162 , and/or the suture  70  are moved across the surface  778  by the loader control  762  as the loader control  762  is moved, for example, from the loader control first position to the loader control second or third position. 
       FIG.  14 F  illustrates the device  188  in the loader  750  with the cap  758  shown transparent for illustrative purposes only. As another example,  FIG.  14 F  illustrates that the loader  750  may not have a cap (e.g., the cap  758 ). 
       FIG.  14 F  illustrates that the first jaw space  752   a  can be deeper (e.g., have a greater height) than the track  756 , and that the track  756  can be deeper (e.g., have a greater height) than the track  776 . For example, the first jaw space  752   a  can have a first jaw space depth, the track  756  can have a loader body shuttle track depth, and the track  776  can have a loader body suture track depth.  FIG.  14 F  illustrates, for example, that the first jaw space depth can be greater than the loader body shuttle track depth, and the loader body shuttle track depth can be greater than the loader body suture track depth.  FIG.  14 F  illustrates that the surface  778  and the bottom surface of the track  776  can be the same level as each other. As another example, the track  776  can be deeper than the surface  778 . As yet another example, the surface  778  can form the track  776 . 
       FIG.  14 F  illustrates that the suture  70  can extend from the shuttle  14  toward the loader control  762  and loop around the loader  750  from a first side of the loader  750  to a second side of the loader  750  through the loader control  762 . For example,  FIG.  14 F  illustrates that the suture  70  can extend through the loader control  762  (e.g., through the suture holder  795 ), can extend through the track  775  in the loader control first side  762   FS , and can extend through the track  775  in the loader control second side  762   SS . 
       FIG.  14 F  illustrates that the lower jaw  38  can be placed in the first jaw space  752   a  and that the upper jaw  30  can be placed in the second jaw space  752   b.    
       FIG.  15 A  illustrates that the jaws can be clamped against the loader body  751  (e.g., by pulling the jaw control  8 ). When the jaws are clamped against the loader body  571 , the shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  via the loader control  762 . As another example, half of the jaws can be clamped against the loader body  751  and half of the jaws can be clamped against the cap  758  (e.g., shown transparent in  FIG.  15 A ).  FIG.  15 A  shows the loader  750  and the device  188  of  FIG.  14 E  in a mid-loaded configuration (also referred to as a partially loaded configuration). As for  FIG.  14 E , half of the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  in  FIG.  15 A  are shown transparent for illustrative purposes only, for example, so that the relationship between the upper and lower jaw tracks  64 ,  66  and the shuttle  14  when the shuttle  14  is between the shuttle first and second positions can be more easily seen. 
       FIG.  15 A  illustrates the loader control  762  can be moved away from the loader control first position to a loader control intermediate position between the loader control first and second positions.  FIG.  15 A  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in an intermediate position, the shuttle  14  can be between the shuttle first and second positions, for example, in a shuttle intermediate position. The intermediate position of the loader control illustrated in  FIG.  15 A  is also referred to as the loader control first intermediate position. The intermediate position of the shuttle  14  illustrated in  FIG.  15 A  is also referred to as the shuttle first intermediate position. 
       FIG.  15 A  illustrates, for example, the loader  750  in a partially loaded configuration and the device  188  in a partially loaded configuration. When the loader  750  is in a partially loaded configuration, the loader control  762  can be between the first and second terminal ends of the track  764 . When the loader  750  is in a partially loaded configuration, the loader control  762  can be between the loader control first position and the loader control second position, for example, in an intermediate position between the loader control first and second positions as shown in  FIG.  15 A . When the loader  750  is in a partially loaded configuration, the suture loop  162  can extend over the track  756 , over the track  776 , and over the surface  778 . When the device  188  is in a partially loaded configuration, a first end of the shuttle  14  can be in the device  188  (e.g., in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) and a second end of the shuttle  14  can be outside of the device  188 , for example, in the track  756 . When the loader  750  is in a partially loaded configuration, the shuttle  14  can be between the shuttle first position and the shuttle second position, for example, in an intermediate position between the shuttle first and second positions as shown in  FIG.  15 A . When the device  188  is in a partially loaded configuration, the suture loop  162  can extend over the track  756 , over the track  776 , and over the surface  778 . 
       FIG.  15 B  illustrates that the loader control  762  can be moved away from the loader control first intermediate position to a loader control second intermediate position, where the loader control second intermediate position can be between the loader control first and second positions. The loader control second intermediate position can be between the loader control first intermediate position and the loader control second position.  FIG.  15 B  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second intermediate position, the shuttle can be between the shuttle first and second positions, for example, in a shuttle second intermediate position. The shuttle second intermediate position can be between the shuttle first intermediate position and the shuttle second position. 
       FIG.  15 B  illustrates, for example, the loader  750  in a partially loaded configuration and the device  188  in a partially loaded configuration. When the loader and the device  750 , are in a partially loaded configuration and the loader control  762  is in the loader control second intermediate position, the suture loop  162  can be in the upper jaw  30 , extend through the upper jaw suture slot  238   b , and extend over both the first jaw space  752   a  and the surface  778 .  FIG.  15 B  illustrates the suture  70  and the suture loop  162  can be fully out of the track  776  when the device  188  is in a partially loaded configuration. When the device  188  is in a partially loaded configuration and the loader control  762  is in the loader control second intermediate position, a first end of the shuttle  14  can be in the device  188  (e.g., in the upper jaw  30  or in the lower jaw  38 ) and a second end of the shuttle  14  can be outside of the device  188 , for example, in the track  756 .  FIG.  15 B  illustrates that both of the male stops  412  illustrated in  FIG.  15 A  can be in the upper jaw  30  (e.g., they no longer extend over the surface  778 ). In the partially loaded configuration shown in  FIG.  15 B , the male stops  412  may not be engaged with a female stop  416 . 
       FIG.  15 B  illustrates that the loader control  762  (e.g., the loader control first side  762   FS ) can have a loader control channel  780  (also referred to as the channel  780 ). The channel  780  can be the opening to the suture holder  795 .  FIG.  15 B  illustrates that the suture  70  can extend into the channel  780 , for example, from the shuttle  14 . 
       FIG.  15 C  illustrates that the surface  778  and the track  776  can have the same height, for example, as measured from the bottom of the track  756 . As another example, the surface  778  can define the track  776 . 
       FIG.  15 C  illustrates that the loader body  751  can have a loader body surface  782  (also referred to as the surface  782 ).  FIG.  15 C  illustrates that the cap  758  can be placed on and/or over the surface  782 . The surface  782  can be above the track  776  and the surface  778 , for example, to provide clearance (e.g., a gap, a space) between the cap  758  and the surface  778  for the suture  70 , the suture loop  162 , and/or the male stops  412  to extend into when the cap  758  is attached to the loader  750 . The cap  758  can be attached to (e.g., glued to) or rest against the surface  782 . The cap  758  can be attached to attachers  784 . The attachers  784  can be, for example, posts or masts. For example, the cap  758  can be glued to the attachers  784 . As another example, the cap  758  can be removably attachable to the attachers  784 , for example, with a friction fit, a snap fit, or a magnetic fit. When the cap  758  is attached to the attachers  784 , the cap  758  can contact or rest against the surface  782 . 
       FIG.  15 D  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in a loader control intermediate position, for example, the intermediate position shown in  FIG.  15 C , the loader  750  and the device  188  can have the arrangement of features shown, for example, with the suture  70  extending across the surface  778  to the loader control  762 . 
       FIG.  15 E  illustrates that when the cap  758  is attached to the loader  750 , a bottom surface of the cap  758  can be in contact with the surface  782 . 
       FIG.  15 E  illustrates that when the cap  758  is attached to the loader  750 , a space  786  (also referred to as a gap  786 ) can be between the cap  758  and the surface  778  for the suture  70 , the suture loop  162 , and/or the male stops  412  to extend into and/or move through. The suture  70 , the suture loop  162 , and/or the male stops  412  can be moveable in the space  786 .  FIG.  15 E  illustrates that the surface  778  can form the track  776 . 
       FIGS.  15 E and  15 F  illustrate that the track  756  can be opposite of the track  760  such that a first lateral side of the shuttle  14  is moveable in the track  756  and a second lateral side of the shuttle  14  is moveable in the track  760 . 
       FIG.  15 F  illustrates that the suture loop  162  can be in the gap  786 . The suture loop  162  can be in the gap  786 , for example, when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, is in the loader control second position, and/or is in any position between the loader control first and second positions. As another example, the suture loop  162  may no longer extend through the gap  786  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position. For example,  FIG.  15 F  can illustrate a cross-sectional view of  FIG.  14 A  with the cap  758  attached to the loader  750 . As another example,  FIG.  15 F  can illustrate a cross-sectional view of  FIG.  15 A  with the cap  758  attached to the loader  750 . As yet another example,  FIG.  15 F  can illustrate a cross-sectional view of  FIG.  15 B  with the cap  758  attached to the loader  750 . 
       FIG.  15 F  illustrates that the gap  786  can be between the cap  758  and the loader body  751 , for example, to inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from lifting out of the plane that extends, for example, between the shuttle  14  and the loader control  762 , and that  FIG.  15 F  shows can be parallel to the surface  778 . 
       FIG.  15 F  illustrates that the surface defining the track  776  and the surface  778  can be same level as each other. For example, the surface defining the track  776  and the surface  778  can be the same distance away from the bottom of the cap  758 . As another example, the surface defining the track  776  and the surface  778  can be the same distance (e.g., height) away from the bottom of the track  756 . 
       FIG.  16    illustrates that the loader control  762  can be moved to the loader control second position. For example,  FIG.  16    illustrates that the loader control  762  can be moved away from the loader control second intermediate position to the loader control second position.  FIG.  16    illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the loader  750  and the device  188  can have the arrangement of features as shown.  FIG.  16    illustrates, for example, that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle second position, and that the shuttle second position can be a fully loaded position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position,  FIG.  16    illustrates that a male stop (e.g., a male stop  412 ) can be engaged with a female stop. When the loader control  762  is moved into the loader control second position (e.g., from the loader control first position), the shuttle  14  can be moved out of the tracks in the shuttle body  751  and the cap  758  (e.g., tracks  756  and  760 ) into the device  188  (e.g., into the upper jaw  30  or into the lower jaw  38 ), the suture loop  162  can be moved out of or off of the track  776  onto or over the surface  778  and/or onto or over the first jaw space  752   a , and the suture  70  can be moved out of or off of the track  776  and onto or over the surface  778  and/or onto or over the first jaw space  752   a , or any combination thereof.  FIG.  16    illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the exposed portion  423  can extend from the device  188 . As another example, when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position and the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle  14  can be fully in the device  188 , for example, such that the shuttle  14  does not extend from the device  188  or does not have an exposed portion (e.g., exposed portion  423 ). 
       FIG.  16    illustrates that the suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can extend under the cap  758  (e.g., under the finger  758   F ), for example, through the space  786 , when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position shown in  FIG.  16   . 
       FIG.  16    illustrates that the cap  558  can be placed over the track  756 , over the track  776 , over a portion of the surface  778 , and over the surface  782 , or over any combination thereof. The cap  558  in  FIG.  16    is shown opaque, so the track  756 , the track  760 , the track  776 , the portion of the surface  778  covered by the cap  758 , and the surface  782  in  FIG.  16    are shown under the cap  758 . 
       FIG.  16    illustrates that half of the jaws can be clamped against the loader body  751  and that half of the jaws can be clamped against the cap  758 . As another example,  FIG.  16    illustrates that the jaws of the device  188  may not be clamped and that the first jaw space  752   a  can be smaller than the second jaw space  752   b  such that the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  can have a tighter fit with the loader  750  than the other jaw in the second jaw space  752   b .  FIG.  16    illustrates for example, that the jaw placed in the first jaw space  752   a  may not float in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., may not have wiggle room in the first jaw space  752   a ) and that the jaw placed in the second jaw space  752   b  can float in second jaw space  752   b  (e.g., can have wiggle room in the second jaw space  752   b ). This can inhibit or prevent the fit between the device  188  and the loader  750  from being too tight while still stabilizing the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  for loading and/or unloading of the shuttle  14  so that the user can easily attach and detach the device  188  to and from the device space  752 . For example,  FIG.  16    illustrates that the space between a wall of the loader body  751  (e.g., the portion of the wall below the reference numeral  756  shown contacting the upper jaw  30  in  FIG.  16   ) and a wall of the cap  758  (e.g., the portion of the cap  758  opposite the portion of the wall below the reference numeral  756  shown contacting the upper jaw  30  in  FIG.  16   ) can be narrower than the same space for the other jaw in the second jaw space  752   b . This can result in a more secure fit for the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  than the jaw in the second jaw space  752   b . The fit can be, for example, an interference fit. As another example, the fit may not be an interference fit but the fit may not allow the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  to float. As yet another example, the fit can allow the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  to float, for example, by 0.50 mm to 1.00 mm, or more broadly from 0.50 mm to about 1.50 mm, including every 0.01 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.50 mm, 1.00 mm, 1.50 mm).  FIG.  16    illustrates that the tolerance in the second jaw space  752   b  can allow the jaw that is in the second jaw space to float such that there is 0.10 mm to about 2.00 mm of space between the jaw and the wall of the loader body  751  defining the second jaw space  752   b , including every 0.01 mm increment within this range (e.g., 0.10 mm, 1.00 mm, 2.00 mm). Although the jaw that is in the second jaw space  752   b  can float in the second jaw space  752   b , the jaw that is in the second jaw space (e.g., the lower jaw  38  in  FIG.  16   ) may or may not be movable in the second jaw space  752   b , for example, toward and/or away from the cap  758 . 
       FIG.  17 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can be moved to the loader control third position.  FIG.  17 A  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the loader  750  and the device  188  can have the arrangement of features as shown.  FIG.  17 A  illustrates, for example, that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle second position, and that the shuttle second position can be a fully loaded position. As another example, when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the shuttle  14  can be in a shuttle third position, which can be an overloaded position of the shuttle  14  in the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, more of the shuttle  14  can be in the device  188  than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position. For example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the exposed portion  423  can extend from the device  188 , and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, less of the exposed portion  423  can extend from the device  188  or the shuttle  14  can be completely in the device  188 . In such cases, moving the loader control  762  from the loader control second position to the loader control third position can move the shuttle  14  about 0.10 mm to about 3.00 mm further into the device  188 , or more narrowly, about 0.10 mm to about 1.50 mm further into the device  188 , including every 0.01 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.10 mm, 0.50 mm, 1.50 mm, 3.00 mm). As another example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle  14  can be farther in the device  188  than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position such that the shuttle  14  is completely in the device  188  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position (e.g., there may not be an exposed portion  423  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position and there may not be an exposed  723  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position). In such cases, moving the loader control  762  from the loader control second position to the loader control third position can move the shuttle  14  about 0.10 mm to about 3.00 mm further into the device  188 , or more narrowly, about 0.10 mm to about 1.50 mm further into the device  188 , including every 0.01 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.10 mm, 0.50 mm, 1.50 mm, 3.00 mm). As yet another example, the shuttle  14  can have the same position (e.g., the shuttle second position) when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position and when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position. 
       FIG.  17 A  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the loader control  762  can be at the second terminal end of the track  764 . When the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the suture  70  and the suture loop  162  can be in the positions shown. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position,  FIG.  17 A  illustrates that a male stop can be engaged with a female stop. As the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position, the suture  70  may not slip through the suture holder  795 . As the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position, the suture  70  can slip through the suture holder  795 . The suture holder  795  can be a friction member that the suture  70  can slip through. As for  FIGS.  14 E and  15 A , the cap  758  and half of the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  in  FIG.  17 A  are shown transparent for illustrative purposes only, for example, so that the relationship between the upper and lower jaw tracks  64 ,  66  and the shuttle  14  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position can be more easily seen. 
       FIG.  17 B  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is moved into the loader control third position (e.g., from the loader control first position), the shuttle  14  can be moved out of the track  756  into the device  188  (e.g., into the upper jaw  30  or into the lower jaw  38 ), the suture loop  162  can be moved out of or off of the track  776  onto or over the surface  778  and/or onto or over the first jaw space  752   a , the suture  70  can moved out of or off of the track  776  and onto or over the surface  778  and/or onto or over the first jaw space  752   a , the suture  70  and/or the suture loop  162  can be moved into the suture holder slot  238  of the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a , or any combination thereof. 
       FIG.  17 B  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the exposed portion  423  can extend from the device  188 . As another example, when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position and the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle  14  can be fully in the device  188 , for example, such that the shuttle  14  does not extend from the device  188 , does not have an exposed portion (e.g., exposed portion  423 ), or less of the exposed portion  423  is exposed when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position than when in the loader control second position. 
       FIG.  17 C  illustrates the arrangement of features shown, for example, that the surface can be a ledge, that the track  776  can be a ledge, that the track  756  can be a channel, that the surface  778  can form a ledge that abuts and forms a wall of the track  756 , and that the surface  778  and the surface forming the track  776  can be the same height (e.g., the same height above the bottom of the track  756 . 
       FIG.  18    illustrates that the suture holder  766  can be attached to (e.g., removably attached to) the loader  750 . The suture holder  766  can be attached to the front side or the back side of the loader  750 . For example,  FIG.  18    illustrates that the suture holder  766  can be attached to the back side of the loader  750 . 
       FIG.  18    illustrates that the loader  750  can have one or multiple holders  788  that can hold the suture holder  766  and the loader  750  together. For example,  FIG.  18    illustrates that the holders  788  can hold the suture holder  766  on the back side of the loader  750 . The holders can be, for example, clips, clasps, magnets, or fasteners, clasps, catches, pins, or any combination thereof. For example,  FIG.  18    illustrates that the holders  788  can be clips that the suture holder  766  can be snapped into.  FIG.  18    illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged with the suture holder  766  attached to the loader  750 , for example, in the arrangement shown with suture  70  on (e.g., wound around) the suture holder  766 . The holders can be part of (e.g., integrated with) the loader body  751 . The holders  788  can be extensions of the loader body  751 . The holders  788  can extend from the loader body  751 .  FIG.  18    illustrates that the loader  750  can have three holders  788 , and that the holders  788  can be evenly spaced apart, for example, every 60 degrees. 
       FIG.  18    illustrates that the suture holder  766  can be rotatable for example, in direction  766   a , in direction  766   b , or in directions  766   a  and  766   b . When the suture holder  766  is attached to the loader  750  (e.g., in the position shown in  FIG.  18   ), the suture holder  766  can be rotatable (e.g., in directions  766   a  and/or  766   b ). For example, the suture holder  766  can rotate in direction  766   a  as the loader control  762  is moved (e.g., from the loader control first position to any subsequent position, for example, to the loader control second position and/or to the loader control third position). As another example, the suture holder  766  can rotate in direction  766   b  as the loader control  762  is moved (e.g., from the loader control second or third position to any subsequent position, for example, to the loader control first position). The suture  70  can release (e.g., passively release) from the suture holder  766  as the suture holder  766  rotates in direction  766   a . As another example, the suture holder  766  can rotate in direction  766   a  as the loader control  762  is moved but the suture  70  may not begin releasing (e.g., passively releasing) from the suture holder  766  until the loader control  762  is in a suture release position at which the suture  70  can begin to unwind from the suture holder  766 . The loader control suture release position can be, for example, an intermediate position between the loader control first and second positions or the loader control second position or beyond such that the suture  70  may not begin to unwind from the suture holder  766  as the loader control  762  is moved in direction  765  until the loader control  762  is in the loader control suture release position. For example,  FIG.  18    illustrates that the suture holder  766  can have a suture grabber  790  that can inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from releasing (e.g., unspooling, unwinding) from the suture holder  766  until the loader control  762  is in the loader control suture release position (e.g., the loader control second position or beyond). This can advantageously keep the suture  70  in tension while the shuttle  14  is being loaded into the device  188  via the loader control  762 . For example, the suture grabber  790  can have a track  791  that the suture  70  can extend through. The track  791  can be a channel, a slot, a groove, or a hole in the suture holder  766 . For example,  FIG.  18    illustrates that the track  791  can be a slot, a groove, or a channel. The track  791  can have curve (e.g., the crescent curve shown) so that the suture  70  is inhibited from releasing from the suture grabber  790  until the loader control  762  is in the suture release position (e.g., the loader control second position) and/or until the loader control threshold force is reached or exceeded. Once the loader control  762  is in the loader control suture release position (e.g., the loader control second position), further movement of the loader control  762  in direction  765 , for example, to the loader control third position, can release the suture  70  from the suture grabber  790  by turning the suture holder  766  to such an extent that that the suture  70  can be pulled out of the track  791  as the loader control  762  is moved beyond the loader control second position. Once the suture  70  is pulled out of the track  791 , the suture  70  can release (e.g., unwind, unspool) from the suture holder  766 . 
     When the loader control  762  is in any position, the user can pull the suture  70  (e.g., with their hands) to release (e.g., actively release) the suture  70  from the suture holder  766 . Passive release from the suture holder  766  can be when movement of the loader control  762  releases the suture  70  from the suture holder  766  and active release from the suture holder  766  can be when the user removes the suture  70  from the suture holder  766 , for example, by pulling the suture  70  with their hand or with something other than the loader control  762  (e.g., with the device  188 ). For example, when the shuttle  14  is fully loaded into the device  188  (e.g., when the shuttle  14  is in any position ranging from the shuttle second position to the shuttle third position and the loader control  762  is in any position ranging from the loader control second position to the loader control third position), the user can release the device  188  from the loader  750  and can pull the rest of the suture  70  off of the suture holder  766  (e.g., through the loader control  762 ), for example, directly with their hands or simply by pulling the device  188  and the loader  750  away from each other. 
       FIG.  18    illustrates that the suture holder  766  can have ribs  792  that can engage with rib engagers  794 . The loader  750  can have, for example, 1 to 3 or more rib engagers  794 . For example,  FIG.  18    illustrates that the loader  750  can have three rib engagers  794 , spaced 120 degrees apart from each other. The ribs and rib engagers  792 ,  794  can inhibit or prevent the suture holder  766  from moving in direction  766   a  and/or in direction  766   b  before use (e.g., when packaged). The ribs and rib engagers  792 ,  794  can provide tactile and/or audible feedback to the user that can indicate that the suture holder  766  is rotating in direction  766   a  during loading. The audible feedback can be, for example, audible clicks that are generated as the suture holder rotates and the ribs  792  rotate past the rib engagers  794 . 
       FIG.  18    illustrates that the suture holder  766  can be a spool. 
       FIG.  18    illustrates that the track  775  on the loader control second side  762   SS  can have the arrangement shown, for example, that it can extend across the outer surface of the loader control second side  762   SS . 
     As the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second position or to the loader control third position, the suture  70  can, for example, passively release (e.g., unspool) from the suture holder  766 . 
     The loader  750  can be packaged with or without suture  70  on (e.g., wound around) the suture holder  766 . For example,  FIG.  18    illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged with the suture  70  wound around the suture holder  766 . Where the loader  750  is not packaged with the suture  70  attached to the loader  750 , the suture  70  can be attached to the suture holder and extended through the loader  762  before use. 
       FIG.  19 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can have the arrangement of features shown.  FIG.  19 A  illustrates that the suture holder  795  can be, for example, a friction member that can inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from slipping through the loader control  762  until the loader control threshold force is reached or exceeded.  FIG.  19 A  illustrates that the suture holder  795  can have a pad  796 , a hinge  797 , or both the pad  796  and the hinge  797 . The suture  70  can pass through the pad  796 , over the pad  796 , or both. The pad  796  can be one, two or more pads. The hinge  797  can be, for example, a living hinge. The hinge  797  can be, for example, a portion (e.g., a middle portion, a folded portion) of the pad  796 . The pad  796  can have the hinge  797 . For example,  FIG.  19 A  illustrates that the hinge  797  can be a portion (e.g., a middle portion) of the pad  796 .  FIG.  19 A  illustrates that the pad  796  can be foldable, for example, about the hinge  797 . 
     The pad  796  can be, for example, a pad (e.g., a single pad) with two sides (e.g., a pad first side  796   a  and a pad second side  796   b ) that can be connected by the hinge  797 .  FIG.  19 A  illustrates that when the pad  796  comprises a single pad having two sides (e.g., the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b ), the pad  796  can be, for example, folded about the hinge  797  such that the two sides (e.g., the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b ) can be pressed into each to releasably hold the suture  70 . The fold in the pad  796  can be the hinge  797 . As another example (e.g., as an alternative example shown in  FIG.  19 A ), the pad  796  can comprise two pads (e.g., a first pad  777   a  and a second pad  777   b ) connected by a hinge (e.g., the hinge  797 ).  FIG.  19 A  illustrates that when the pad  796  comprise two pads (e.g., first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b ), the two pads (e.g., first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b ) can be pressed into each other to releasably hold the suture  70 . The suture  70  can pass between the two pads of the suture holder  795  (e.g., first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b ), or can pass between the two sides (e.g., the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b ) of a single pad (e.g., of the pad  796 ) of the suture holder  795 . 
     The pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b  can be pressable against each other and the suture  70  to hold the suture  70  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  via the loader control  762 . The pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b  can be pressable against each other and the suture  70  to hold the suture  70  as the shuttle  14  is unloaded from the device  188  via the loader control  762 . The first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  can be pressable against each other and the suture  70  to hold the suture  70  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  via the loader control  762 . The first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  can be pressable against each other and the suture  70  to hold the suture  70  as the shuttle  14  is unloaded from the device  188  via the loader control  762 . 
     When the loader control first side  762   FS  and the loader control second side  762   SS  are pressed together (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  19 A ), the pad  796  of the suture holder  795  can clamp the suture  70  in the loader control  762  (e.g., either between the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b  or between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b ), inhibiting or preventing the suture  70  from slipping through the loader control  762  until the loader control threshold force is reached or exceeded as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second or third position. The suture  70  can slip through the suture holder  795 , for example, as the loader control  762  is moved from a fully loaded position to an overloaded position. For example, the suture  70  can slip through the suture holder  795  as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position. The loader control threshold can be reached or exceeded by interference between the shuttle  14  and the device  188  as loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position. As the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position, the device  188  can allow the shuttle  14  to move from the shuttle second position to the shuttle third position but can resist or interfere with movement of the shuttle  14  further into the device  188  beyond the shuttle third position. For example, as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position, the shuttle  14  can be moved by the loader control  762  about 0.10 mm to about 3.00 mm further into the device  188 , or more narrowly, about 0.10 mm to about 1.50 mm further into the device  188 , including every 0.01 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.10 mm, 0.50 mm, 1.50 mm, 3.00 mm). The shuttle  14  can reach the shuttle third position when the loader control  762  is between the loader control second and third positions. As another example, the shuttle  14  can reach the shuttle third position when the loader control  762  reaches the loader control third position. Once the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, further movement of the shuttle  14  into the device  188  can be inhibited or prevented by the device  188 , at which point further movement of the loader control  762  to the loader control third position can cause the tension in the suture  70  to increase until the loader control threshold force is reached or exceeded. The loader control threshold force can be reached or exceeded when the loader control  762  is between the loader control second and third positions. The device  188  can inhibit or prevent further movement of the shuttle  14  into the device  188  once the shuttle  14  reaches the shuttle third position, for example, by obstructing further movement of the shuttle  14 . Further movement can be inhibited or prevented by the device  188  via a resistor. The resistor can be inside device  188 . The resistor can be, for example, the female stop  416  that the male stop  412  can be engaged with when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, an end of the shuttle track that the shuttle  14  can be in during loading (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the jaw lower jaw track  66 ), or both. For example, the resistor can be a proximal wall or edge of the female stop  416 , can be a proximal wall or edge of the shuttle track, or any combination thereof. For example, the shuttle  14  can be considered to be in the shuttle third position when a male stop  412  (e.g., the leading male stop  412 ) contacts a proximal wall or edge of a female stop  416  (e.g., the wall or edge farthest from the tip of the jaw that the shuttle  14  is in) such that when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the engagement between the male stop  412  and the wall or edge of the female stop  416  can inhibit or prevent the shuttle  14  from being loaded further into the device  188  as the loader control  762  is moved further to the loader control third position while the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position. As the loader control  762  is moved to the loader control third position, the shuttle  14  can remain in the shuttle third position. This can cause the tension in the suture  70  to increase as the loader control  762  is moved toward the loader control third position, for example, as the distance between the loader control  762  and the shuttle  14  increases. The suture  70  can begin moving through the suture holder  795  (e.g., sliding and/or rolling) once the force on the suture  70  reaches or exceeds the loader control threshold force, at which point the suture  70  can slide and/or roll in the suture holder  795  as the loader control  762  continues to be moved to the loader control third position. The loader control threshold force can be, for example, from about 2.00 lbs to about 10.00 lbs, including every 0.01 lb increment within this range (e.g., 2.00 lbs, 3.00 lbs, 6.00 lbs, 10.00 lbs). The loader control threshold force can be higher than the loading force needed for loading the shuttle  14  into the device  188  or the unloading force need for unloading the shuttle  14  from the device  188 . For example, the loading force can be about 0.30 lbs to about 4.00 lbs, including every 0.01 lb increment within this range (e.g., 0.30 lbs, 0.50 lbs, 2.00 lbs, 4.00 lbs). For example, the unloading force can be about 0.30 lbs to about 4.00 lbs, including every 0.01 lb increment within this range (e.g., 0.30 lbs, 0.50 lbs, 2.00 lbs, 4.00 lbs). As another example, the suture  70  can be inhibited or prevented from slipping through the suture holder  795 , for example, as the loader control  762  is moved from a fully loaded position to an overloaded position. 
       FIG.  19 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can have a loader control connector  762   C  that can connect the loader control first and second sides  762   FS ,  762   SS , which can extend through the track  764 , which can guide the loader control  762  along the track  764 , or any combination thereof. 
     The loader control  762  can be openable and closable, as shown by the arrows  798   a  and  798   b .  FIG.  19 A  illustrates, for example, that the loader control  762  can be openable and closable about the hinge  797 . The loader control first side  762   FS  can be movable toward the loader control second side  762   SS  in direction  798   a  about the hinge  797  to close the loader control  762 , to close the suture holder  795 , or to close both. The loader control first side  762   F s can be movable away from the loader control second side  762   SS  in direction  798   b  about the hinge  797  to open the loader control  762 , to open the suture holder  795 , or to open both. For example,  FIG.  19 A  illustrates that the loader control first side can have a loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  and a loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . The loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  can be attached to or integral with the loader control second side  762   SS , for example, via the loader control connector  762   C . The loader control first side first and second portions  762   FS1 ,  762   FS2  can be first and second portions (e.g., halves) of the loader control first side  762   FS . The loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  can be movable toward the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  and toward the loader control second side  762   SS  in direction  798   a  about the hinge  797  to close the loader control  762 , to close the suture holder  795 , or to close both. The loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  can be movable away from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  and away from the loader control second side  762   SS  in direction  798   b  about the hinge  797  to open the loader control  762 , to open the suture holder  795 , or to open both. For example, the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  can be lowered in direction  798   a  and lifted in direction  798   b  to close and open the loader control  762 , to close and open the suture holder  795 , or to close and open both. 
     As the suture holder  795  is opened, the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  can rotate about the hinge  797  away from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . The suture holder  795  can be opened, for example, to load the loader control  762  with the suture  70 , to remove the suture  70  from the loader control  762  (e.g., after the shuttle  14  is fully loaded into the device  188 ), or both. As the suture holder  795  is closed, the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  can rotate about the hinge  797  toward from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . The suture holder  795  can be closed, for example, to secure the suture  70  to the loader control  762  (e.g., before the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 ), for example, by clamping the suture  70  between the loader control first and second portions  762   FS1 ,  762   FS2  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764 , to inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from slipping through the suture holder  795  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764 , or both. 
       FIG.  19 A  illustrates that the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b  can be pressable against each other, for example, by pressing the loader control first and second sides  762   FS ,  762   SS  together as shown by the two opposing arrows  799 . As another example, the pad first side  796   a  can be pressable against the pad second side  796   b  (e.g., the top arrow  799  in  FIG.  19 A ) with or without pressing against the pad second side  796   b  (e.g., the bottom arrow  799  in  FIG.  19 A ).  FIG.  19 A  illustrates that the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  can be pressable against each other, for example, by pressing the loader control first and second sides  762   FS ,  762   SS  together as shown by the arrows  799 . As another example, the first pad  777   a  can be pressable against the pad second side  796   b  (e.g., the top arrow  799  in  FIG.  19 A ) with or without pressing against the pad second side  796   b  (e.g., the bottom arrow  799  in  FIG.  19 A ). The loader control first and second sides  762   FS ,  762   SS  can be pressable together, for example, using one or more fingers. One finger can be used, for example, if the device  188  is resting against something (e.g., a table). Two or more fingers (e.g., a thumb and one or more other fingers) can be used to squeeze the loader control  762  with on hand. 
       FIG.  19 B  illustrates that the suture  70  can extend though the through the suture holder  795 . For example,  FIG.  19 B  illustrates that the suture  70  can extend through (e.g., transversely through) the suture holder  795  between the pad first side  796   a  and the pad second side  796   b . As another example,  FIG.  19 B  illustrates that the suture  70  can extend through (e.g., transversely through) the suture holder  795  between the first pad  777   a  and the second pad  777   b.    
       FIGS.  19 A and  19 B  illustrate, for example, that the loader control  762  can be openable and closable about the hinge  797  such that the loader control  762  can have an openable and closable space for the suture  70 .  FIGS.  19 A and  19 B  illustrate, for example, that the loader control  762  can be openable and closable about the hinge  797  such that the loader control  762  can have compressible space for the suture  70 .  FIG.  19 B  illustrates that when suture holder  795  is closed, the suture  70  can be clamped in the suture holder  795  such that the suture  70  can be inhibited or prevented from moving (e.g., slipping, sliding, rolling) in the suture holder  795  (e.g., between the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b  or between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b ) until, for example, the loader control threshold force is reached and/or exceeded. 
       FIGS.  19 A and  19 B  illustrate that the suture  70  can be attachable to the loader control  762 .  FIGS.  19 A and  19 B  illustrate that the suture  70  can be placeable in the loader control  762 . For example,  FIGS.  19 A and  19 B  illustrate that the suture  70  can be placeable in suture holder  795 .  FIGS.  19 A and  19 B  illustrate that the suture  70  can be removable from the loader control  762 , for example, removable from the suture holder  795 . 
     The suture holder  795  can hold the suture  70  and/or the suture  70  can slip through the suture holder  795  without the suture  70  being damaged. 
     The shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  (e.g., into the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 ) using one hands or two hands. For example, for two handed loading, one hand can be squeezing the jaw control  8  to clamp the jaws against the loader  750  (e.g., against the cap  758  and/or against the loader body  751 ) and the other hand can squeeze the loader control  762  (e.g., arrows  799 ) and move the loader control  762 , for example, from the loader control first position to the loader control second position or any subsequent loader control position (e.g., to the loader control third position) in direction  765 . For one handed loading, the device  188  can be placed in the device space  752  and the loader  750  can be tilted so that gravity can cause the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38  to make contact with the cap  758  and/or with the loader body  751  so that the shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188 . While the loader  750  is tilted, one or both hands can move the loader control  762 , for example, from the loader control first position to the loader control second position or any subsequent loader control position (e.g., to the loader control third position). 
     The loader  750  can be a single-use loader or a multiple-use loader. Where the loader  750  is a single-use loader, the loader  750  can be disposed of after the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . Where the loader  750  is a multiple-use loader, a new shuttle  14  or the same shuttle  14  can be inserted into the loader  750  (e.g., into the track  758  and/or the track  760 ), a new suture  70  can be attached to the shuttle  14  and extended through the loader control  762  (e.g., through the suture holder  795 ), and/or the new suture  70  can be wound around the suture holder  766 . 
     The device  188  can be a multiple-use device, such that one or multiple shuttles  14  can be loaded and removed from the device  188 . For example, where the shuttle  14  has a lifespan of 2 to 10 passes through tissue, the shuttle  14  can be removed from the device  188  once the lifespan of the shuttle  14  expires or after the shuttle  14  no longer adequately moves or cuts through tissue (e.g., whichever is earlier) and a new shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  using the same loader  750  (e.g., if the loader is multiple-use) or a different loader  750  (e.g., if the loader is single-use). 
     The handle of the device  188  in  FIGS.  14 B- 15 B,  16 , and  17 A  is not shown for illustrative purposes only. 
     When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., a shuttle non-loaded position), the shuttle  14  can have a shuttle first radius of curvature. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position (e.g., a shuttle loaded position), the shuttle  14  can have a shuttle second radius of curvature. The shuttle first and second radius of curvatures can be the same as or different from each other. For example, when different from each other, the shuttle first radius of curvature can be less then or greater than the shuttle second radius of curvature. For example,  FIG.  14 A  illustrates that when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle  14  can have the shuttle first radius of curvature, and  FIGS.  16  and  17 A  illustrate that when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle  14  can have the shuttle second radius of curvature.  FIGS.  16  and  17 A  further illustrate that the shuttle second radius of curvature can be less than the shuttle first radius of curvature. For example, the shuttle second radius of curvature can be, for example, about 0.010 in. to about 0.075 in. less than the shuttle first radius of curvature, including every 0.001 in. increment within this range (e.g., 0.010 in., 0.015 in., 0.075 in.). The shuttle  14  can be a spring. For example, when the shuttle  14  has the shuttle second radius of curvature, the shuttle  14  can be biased to have the shuttle first radius of curvature. For example, when the shuttle  14  has the shuttle second radius of curvature and is in the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 , the shuttle  14  can be biased to push the male stops  412  outward (e.g., radially outward) into the female stops  416  when the shuttle  14  is moved (e.g., translated) into the upper jaw  30  or into the lower jaw  38  from the loader  750  (e.g., via the loader control  762 ). As another example, the shuttle  14  can have the same radius of curvature (e.g., the shuttle first radius of curvature) before and after being loaded into the device  188 . For example, the shuttle  14  can have the same radius of curvature (e.g., the shuttle first radius of curvature) when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position. The loader control  762  can move the male stops  412  into engagement with the female stops  416 , for example, by moving the loader in direction  765  (e.g., from the loader control first position to the loader control second position). As another example, the loader control  762  can move the male stops  412  out of engagement with the female stops  416 , for example, by moving the loader in a direction opposite to direction  765  (e.g., from the control second position to the loader control first position), for example, if an adjustment is desired (e.g., realign the shuttle  14  or the device  188  in or on the loader  750 ). 
     The loader  750  can be used to load a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) and/or a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 ) into a suture device (e.g., a device  188 ). The loader  750  can have a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) and/or a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 ) that can be moved (e.g., via the loader control  762 ) from a non-loaded configuration (e.g.,  FIG.  14 A ) to a loaded configuration (e.g.,  FIGS.  16    and/or  FIG.  17 A ) without damaging the suture or the shuttle, or with causing minimal damage to the suture or the shuttle such that the suture or the shuttle can still be used after the minimal damage is caused during the loading the loading process. 
       FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can be a releasably lockable loader control.  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the suture holder  795  can be a releasably lockable suture holder.  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can have a releasably lockable suture holder (e.g., the suture holder  795 ).  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can have a connector  800 . The connector  800  can releasably connect two portions of the loader control  762  together so that the loader control  762  can be openable and closable. The connector  800  can releasably keep the loader control  762  in a closed configuration. The connector  800  can releasably keep the suture holder  795  in a closed configuration. For example, the connector  800  can releasably connect the loader control first side  762   FS  to the loader control second side  762   SS . As another example, the connector  800  can releasably connect the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  to the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . 
       FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the connector  800  can be, for example, a clip. The clip can be snap. The clip can have a snap fit. The clip can be, for example, a cantilever snap. The clip can be, for example, a latch. The connector  800  can have a male portion  802  and a female portion  804 . The female portion  804  can releasably catch the male portion  802 . The male portion  802  can have an arm  806  and one or multiple protrusions  808  (e.g., one, two, three, or more protrusions  808 ). For example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the arm  806  can have a first protrusion  808   a  and a second protrusion  808   b . The protrusions  808  can extend from the arm  806 . The first protrusion  808   a  can be the same size or a different size than the second protrusion  808   b . For example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the first protrusion  808   a  can be smaller than the second protrusion  808   b . The female portion  804  can be a catch that can catch the protrusions  808 . For example, the female portion  804  can have a tapered entrance  810 , a lip  812 , and a channel  814 , or any combination thereof. The lip  812  can deflect the arm  806  and/or the protrusions  808 . The tapered entrance  810  can be part of the channel  814  or may not be part of the channel  814 . For example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the channel  814  can have a channel first end and a channel second end, and the tapered entrance  810  can be the channel first end such that the channel first end can be wider than the channel second end. As another example, the female portion  804  may not have the tapered entrance  810 . In such cases, the channel first and second ends can have, for example, the same width. 
     The tapered entrance  814  can align the protrusions  808  with the catch as the loader control  762  is moved from an open configuration to a closed configuration. The tapered entrance  814  can guide the protrusions  808  into the channel  814  as the loader control  762  is moved from an open configuration to a closed configuration.  FIG.  20 A  illustrates, for example, that the tapered entrance  810  can have a proximal tapered surface, a distal tapered surface, and two lateral tapered surfaces, or any combination thereof (e.g., only the distal tapered surface). The lip  812  can be a wall, surface, and/or ledge adjacent to the channel  814  and/or defining the channel  814 . For example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the distal wall of the channel  814  (e.g., the distal tapered surface) of the tapered entrance  810  can be the lip  812 . For variations that do not have a tapered entrance (e.g., the tapered entrance  810 ), the lip  812  can be a wall, surface, and/or ledge that is adjacent to and/or defines the channel  814 . The channel  814  can be a through-hole in the loader control  962  (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  20 A ), for example, in the loader control first side  962   FS  (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  20 A ) and/or in the loader control second side  962   SS . As another example, the channel  814  can be a recess in the loader control  962 , for example, in the loader control first side  962   FS . For example, the female portion  804  can be a catch having the channel  814  (e.g., with or without the tapered entrance  810 ) with a lip  812  that can deflect the arm  806 . 
     The protrusions  808  can be engageable and disengageable with the female portion  804 , for example, with the lip  812 . For example, the first protrusion  808   a  can be engageable and disengageable with the lip  812 , and the second protrusion  808   b  can be engageable and disengageable with the lip  812 . 
     The protrusions  808  (e.g., the first and second protrusions  808   a ,  808   b ) can be independently engageable and independently disengageable with the female portion  804 , for example, with the lip  812 . Each of the protrusions  808  (e.g., the first and second protrusions  808   a ,  808   b ) can be separately engageable and disengageable with the lip  812 . 
     The protrusions  808  (e.g., the first and second protrusions  808   a ,  808   b ) can be sequentially engageable and/or sequentially disengageable with the female portion  804 , for example, with the lip  812 . For example, as the arrangement of the protrusions  808  in  FIG.  20 A  illustrates, the first protrusion  808   a  can be engaged with the lip  812 , and then the second protrusion  808   b  can be engaged with the lip  812 . As another example, as the arrangement of the protrusions  808  in  FIG.  20 A  illustrates, the second protrusion  808   b  can be disengaged from the lip  812 , and then the first protrusion  808   a  can be disengaged from the lip  812 . 
     The connector  800  can have one or multiple engaged configurations. The one or multiple engaged configurations can be closed configurations of the connector  800 . The number of engaged configurations of the connector  800  can correspond to the number of protrusions  808  that the connector  800  has. For example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the connector  800  can have two protrusions  808 , for example, the first protrusion  808   a  and the second protrusion  808   b , such that the connector  800  can have two engaged configurations. For example,  FIG.  20 B  illustrates that the connector  800  can have a connector first engaged configuration (also referred to as a connector first closed configuration) when the first protrusion  808   a  is engaged with the female portion  804 , and  FIG.  20 C  illustrates that the connector  800  can have a connector second engaged configuration (also referred to as a connector second closed configuration) when the second protrusion  808   b  is engaged with the female portion  804 . The engaged configurations can be, for example, clipped or latched configurations. 
     The male portion  802  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control first side  762   FS  or the loader control second side  762   SS . The female portion  804  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control first side  762   FS  or the loader control second side  762   SS . For example, the male portion  802  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control first side  762   FS  and the female portion  804  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control second side  762   SS , or vice versa. As another example, the male portion  802  and the female portion  804  can both be attached to or integrated with the loader control first side  762   FS  or the loader control second side  762   FS . For example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the male portion  802  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  and that the female portion  804  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 .  FIG.  20 A  illustrates, for example, that the arm  806  can extend from the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  and that the channel  814  can extend through the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . As another example, the male portion  802  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  and the female portion  804  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  such that the arm  806  can extend from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  and such that the channel  814  can extend through the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 . 
       FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can have a spring  816 . The spring  816  can be, for example, a compression spring or a torsion spring. For example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the spring  816  can be a torsion spring having a coil  818 , a spring first arm  820 , and a spring second arm  822 . The spring  816  can bias the loader control  762  to have an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ). The spring  816  can bias the connector  800  to have an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ). The spring  816  can be metal, for example, steel. 
       FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the hinge  797  may not be a living hinge. For example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the hinge  797  can have a pin  824  and that the hinge  797  can be loaded with the spring  816 . The pin  824  can, for example, extend through the coil  818 . The pin  824  can, for example, extend through one or more arms  823  of the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 .  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  can have two arms  823 , each with a channel  825 . The pin  824  can extend through the channels  825 . The pin  824  can, for example, extend through one or more arms  827  of the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 .  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  can have two arms  827 , each with a channel  829  (shown in  FIG.  20 J ). The pin  824  can extend through the channels  829 . The hinge  797  can include, for example, the arms  823 , the channels  825 , the arms  827 , the channels  829 , the spring  816 , the pin  824 , or any combination thereof. As another example, the hinge  797  can be a living hinge such as the hinge  797  shown in  FIGS.  19 A and  19 B . 
     In  FIG.  20 A , the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822  are both shown on the second pad  777   b , for example, so that both the spring arms can be clearly seen. However, in operation, the spring first arm  820  can be biased against the first pad  777   a  and the spring second arm  822  can be biased against the second pad  777   b  such that as the loader control  762  is closed from an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ), the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822  can resist the closure by pressing against the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b , respectively. In other words, in operation, the spring first arm  820  can be in contact with the first pad  777   a  and the spring second arm  822  can be in contact with the second pad  777   b  when the loader control  762  is in an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ). The open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A  can be, for example, a partially open configuration (e.g., a half open configuration). The open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A  can be, for example, a fully open configuration. 
       FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the protrusions  808  (e.g., the first and second protrusions  808   a ,  808   b ) can be engaged with the female portion  804  by closing the loader control  962 . The loader control  962  can be closed, for example, by moving (e.g., rotating, translating, or both rotating and translating) the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 ) toward the loader control second side  762   SS . For example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the loader control  962  can be closed by moving (e.g., rotating) the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 ) toward the loader control second side  762   SS  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   a . As another example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the loader control  962  can be closed by moving (e.g., rotating, translating, or both rotating and translating) the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  toward the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   a . As yet another example,  FIG.  20 A  illustrates that the loader control  962  can be closed by moving (e.g., rotating, translating, or both rotating and translating) the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  toward the loader control first side second portion  762   s   2  and toward the loader control second side  762   SS  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   a.    
       FIGS.  20 B and  20 C  illustrate that the male portion  802  can be moved into (e.g., pushed into) the female portion  804 .  FIGS.  20 B and  20 C  illustrate that the male portion  802  can be moved into (e.g., pushed into) engagement with the female portion  804 .  FIG.  20 B  illustrates, for example, that when the first protrusion  808   a  is engaged with the female portion (e.g., with the lip  812 ), the loader control  962  can have a loader control first engaged configuration (also referred to as a loader control first closed configuration). The loader control first closed configuration can be a releasably lockable first closed configuration. The loader control  762  can have the loader control first engaged configuration when the connector  800  has the connector first engaged configuration.  FIG.  20 C  illustrates, for example, that when the second protrusion  808   b  is engaged with the female portion  804  (e.g., with the lip  812 ), the loader control  962  can have a loader control second engaged configuration (also referred to as a loader control second closed configuration). The loader control first closed configuration can be a releasably lockable second closed configuration. The loader control  762  can have the loader control second engaged configuration when the connector  800  has the connector second engaged configuration. 
       FIGS.  20 B and  20 C  illustrate that the loader control  762  can be releasably lockable with the connector  800 . The loader control  762  can be, for example, releasably locked by engaging the male portion  802  with the female portion  804  or vice versa. The loader control  762  can be, for example, unlocked from a releasably locked configuration (e.g., from the releasably lockable first closed configuration and/or from the releasably lockable second closed configuration) by disengaging the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  or vice versa. 
       FIGS.  20 A and  20 B  illustrate that the first protrusion  808   a  can be moved into engagement with the lip  812 , for example, by the user moving (e.g., pushing) the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 ) toward the loader control second side  762   SS  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   a .  FIGS.  20 A and  20 B  illustrate that the first protrusion  808   a  can be moved into engagement with the lip  812 , for example, by the user moving (e.g., pushing) the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  toward the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   a .  FIGS.  20 A and  20 B  illustrate that the first protrusion  808   a  can be moved into engagement with the lip  812 , for example, by the user moving (e.g., pushing) the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  toward the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  and toward the loader control second side  762   SS  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   a . One or both sides of the loader control  762  can be moved toward the opposite side of the loader control  762  as shown by the two opposing arrows  799  in  FIG.  20 B . 
       FIGS.  20 A and  20 B  illustrate that the user can move the loader control  762  from an open configuration to a first closed configuration (e.g., from the open configuration in  FIG.  20 A  to the closed configuration in  FIG.  20 B ), for example, by forcing the first protrusion  808   a  into the female portion  804  and/or by forcing the female portion  804  over the first protrusion  808   a . This can be accomplished, for example, by applying a compressive force against the loader control  762  as shown by the two opposing arrows  799  in  FIG.  20 B . A compressive force can be applied to the loader control  762 , for example, by the user squeezing two sides of the loader control  762  (e.g., the loader control first and second sides  762   FS ,  762   SS ) together until they hear an audible click, which can indicate that the first protrusion  808   a  is engaged with the lip  812 . The audible click can be generated, for example, by the arm  806  snapping against the lip  812 . The arm  806  can snap against the lip  812 , for example, once the first protrusion  808   a  is moved past the lip  812 . 
       FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the second protrusion  808   b  can be moved into engagement with the lip  812 , for example, by the user moving (e.g., pushing) the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 ) toward the loader control second side  762   SS  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   a . One or both sides of the loader control  762  can be moved toward the opposite side of the loader control  762  as shown by the two opposing arrows  799  in  FIGS.  20 B and  20 C . 
       FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the user can move the loader control  762  from an open configuration to a second closed configuration (e.g., from the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A  to the closed configuration shown in  FIG.  20 C ), for example, by forcing the second protrusion  808   b  into the female portion  804  and/or by forcing the female portion  804  over the second protrusion  808   b . This can be accomplished, for example, by applying a compressive force against the loader control  762  as shown by the two opposing arrows  799  in  FIGS.  20 B and  20 C . A compressive force can be applied to the loader control  762 , for example, by the user squeezing two sides of the loader control  762  (e.g., the loader control first and second sides  762   FS ,  762   SS ) together until they hear two sequential clicks, the first of which can indicate that the first protrusion  808   a  is engaged with the lip  812  and the second of which can indicate that the second protrusion  808   b  is engaged with the lip  812 . The first audible click can be generated, for example, by the portion of the arm  806  between the first protrusion  808   a  and the second protrusion  808   b  snapping against the lip  812 , and the second audible click can be generated, for example, by the portion of the arm  806  between the second protrusion  808   b  and the base of the arm  806  snapping against the lip  812 . The first audible click can be generated, for example, once the first protrusion  808   a  is moved past the lip  812 , and the second audible click can be generated, for example, once the second protrusion is moved past the lip  812 . 
       FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the user can move the loader control  762  from the loader control first closed configuration to the loader control second closed configuration (e.g., from the closed configuration shown in  FIG.  20 B  to the closed configuration shown in  FIG.  20 C ), for example, by forcing the male portion  802  of the connector  800  further into the female portion  804  of the connector  800 , or vice versa, such that the second protrusion  808   b  can become engaged with the female portion  804 . This can be accomplished, for example, by applying a compressive force against the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration as shown by the two opposing arrows  799  in  FIG.  20 B . The arrows  799  in  FIG.  20 C  illustrate that the user can choose to compress the loader control  762  further for an even a stronger grip on the suture  70 , for example, between the first pad  777   a  and the second pad  777   b  if desired. A compressive force can be applied to the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration, for example, by the user squeezing two sides of the loader control  762  (e.g., the loader control first and second sides  762   FS ,  762   SS ) together until they hear an audible click, which can indicate that the second protrusion  808   b  is engaged with the lip  812 . The audible clicks can be generated, for example, by the arm  806  snapping against the lip  812 . 
     The loader control first closed configuration can be the shipping configuration of the loader control  762 . The loader control first closed configuration can be the packaged configuration of the loader control  762 . For example, the loader  750  can be packaged with the loader control  762  in the loader control first closed configuration. As another example, an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ) can be the shipping configuration of the loader control  762  such that the loader  750  can be packaged with the loader control  762  in an open configuration. 
     The loader control second closed configuration can be the shuttle loading configuration of the loader control  762 . For example, the loader control  762  can have the loader control second closed configuration when the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764 , for example, in direction  765 . For example, the loader control  762  can have the loader control second closed configuration as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764 , for example, in direction  765  from a first position along the track  764  (e.g., from the loader control first position) to a second position along the track  764  (e.g., to the loader control second position). 
     The loader control second closed configuration can be the shuttle unloading configuration of the loader control  762 . For example, the loader control  762  can have the loader second closed configuration when the shuttle  14  is unloaded from the device  188  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764 , for example, in a direction opposite to direction  765 . For example, the loader control  762  can have the loader control second closed configuration as the shuttle  14  is unloaded from the device  188  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764 , for example, in a direction opposite to direction  765  from a second position along the track  764  (e.g., from the loader control second position) to a first position along the track  764  (e.g., to the loader control first position). 
     The loader control first closed configuration (e.g.,  FIG.  20 B ) can be a lighter hold than the loader control second closed configuration (e.g.,  FIG.  20 C ). For example, the loader control first closed configuration can clamp the suture  70  less than the loader control second closed configuration. For example, when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration, the suture  70  may not be clamped by the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  or the suture  70  can be clamped by the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  but the suture  70  may not be inhibited from slipping through the loader control  762  (e.g., from slipping between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b ) as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764 . When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the suture  70  can be clamped by the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  such that the suture  70  can be inhibited or prevented from slipping through the loader control  762  (e.g., from slipping between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b ) as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764  until the loader control threshold force is reached or exceeded. 
       FIG.  20 B  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration, the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  may not contact each other. In other words, a gap can be between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration. As another example, there may not be a gap between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first configuration such that the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  can contact each other when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration. 
       FIG.  20 C  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  can contact each other. 
     The first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  can be a compressible material. The first pad  777   a  can be a compressible material, the second pad  777   b  can be a compressible material, or the first pad  777   a  and the second pad  777   b  can be a compressible material. The first pad  777   a  can be compressible, the second pad  777   b  can be compressible, or the first pad  777   a  and the second pad  777   b  can be compressible. The first pad  777   a  can be incompressible, the second pad  777   b  can be incompressible, or the first pad  777   a  and the second pad can be incompressible. As another example, the first pad  777   a  can be compressible and the second pad  777   b  can be incompressible, or vice versa. The first pad  777   a  and the second pad  777   b  can have the same hardness or a different hardness. 
       FIG.  20 B  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration, the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  may not compressed. As another example, when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration, the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  can be compressed less than when the connector  800  is in the connector second closed configuration. 
       FIG.  20 C  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  can be pressed against each other such that the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  are in a compressed state. This compression can inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from slipping through the loader control  762  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764  until the loader control threshold force is reached or exceeded. 
     The loader control first and second closed configurations can be advantageous, for example, for both shipping and use purposes. The loader control first closed configuration can, for example, inhibit or prevent the pad  796  (e.g., the first pad  777   a  and the second pad  777   b , the pad first side  796   a  and the pad second side  796   b ) from contacting each other or being compressed before use so that the lifespan of the pad  796  (e.g., the first pad  777   a  and the second pad  777   b , the pad first side  796   a  and the pad second side  796   b ) can be preserved. This can help ensure that the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  or the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b  can inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from slipping through the loader control  762  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764 . The loader control second closed configuration can, for example, indicate to the user that the loader control  762  has been closed far enough to adequately pinch the suture  70  during movement of the loader control  762  to load and unload the shuttle  14  and/or the suture  70 . As another example, the loader control second closed configuration can allow the user to let go of the loader control  762  or relax their grip on the loader control  762  without the suture  70  slipping through the loader control  762 , for example, because the clip  800  can keep the loader control  762  in the loader control second closed configuration. This can allow the user to focus on moving the loader control  762  to load and/or unload the shuttle  14  without also having to keep squeezing the loader control  762 . This can make the loader control  750  easier and less complicated to use and can reduce the likelihood of the suture  70  prematurely slipping through the loader control  762  during loading or unloading. 
       FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the protrusions  808  (e.g., the first and second protrusions  808   a ,  808   b ) can be disengaged from the female portion  804  by opening the loader control  962  from a closed configuration. The loader control  962  can be opened, for example, by disengaging the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  and moving (e.g., rotating, translating, or both rotating and translating) the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 ) away from the loader control second side  762   SS . The loader control  962  can be opened, for example, by disengaging the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  and moving (e.g., rotating, translating, or both rotating and translating) the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  away from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . For example,  FIGS.  20 B and  20 C  illustrate that the loader control  962  can be opened by disengaging the male and female portions  802 ,  804  and moving (e.g., rotating) the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 ) away from the loader control second side  762   SS  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   b . The loader control  962  can be opened from a closed configuration (e.g., from the loader control first closed configuration or the loader control second closed configuration) to an open configuration (e.g., to the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ). The loader control  962  can be opened, for example, by disengaging the male portion  802  from the female portion  804 , whereby once the male portion  802  is disengaged from the female portion  804 , the spring  816  can move (e.g., rotate, translate, or both rotate and translate) the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 ) away from the loader control second side  762   SS  to an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ). The loader control  962  can be opened, for example, by disengaging the male portion  802  from the female portion  804 , whereby once the male portion  802  is disengaged from the female portion  804 , the spring  816  can move (e.g., rotate, translate, or both rotate and translate) the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  away from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  to an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ). For example,  FIGS.  20 B and  20 C  illustrate that the loader control  962  can be opened by disengaging the male and female portions  802 ,  804 , whereby once the male and female portions  802 ,  804  are disengaged from each other, the spring  816  can move (e.g., rotate) the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 ) away from the loader control second side  762   SS  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   b . As another example,  FIGS.  20 B and  20 C  illustrate that the loader control  962  can be opened by disengaging the male and female portions  802 ,  804 , whereby once the male and female portions  802 ,  804  are disengaged from each other, the spring  816  can move (e.g., rotate) the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  away from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  about the hinge  797  in direction  798   b.    
       FIGS.  20 B and  20 C  illustrate that the male portion  802  can be disengaged from the female portion  804  by deflecting the arm  806  and the protrusions  808  in direction  826 . Direction  826  can be a direction opposite the protrusions  808 . For example,  FIGS.  20 B and  20 C  illustrate that direction  826  can be toward the hinge  797 . The user can deflect the arm and the protrusions  808  in direction  826 , for example, by pushing the arm  806  and one or both of the protrusions  808  in direction  826 . In such a case, the loader control  762  can be actively opened from a closed configuration by the user. As another example, the arm  806  and/or the protrusions  808  can be deflectable in direction  826  by the loader  750  (e.g., by the opener  834  shown in  FIG.  21 A ) when the loader control  762  reaches the loader control second or third position or any position between the loader control second and third positions. In such a case, the loader control  762  can be passively opened from a closed configuration by the loader  750 . 
     Once the protrusion  808  (e.g., the first protrusion  808   a  or the second protrusion  808   b ) that is engaged with the female portion  804  is deflected far enough to clear the lip  812 , the spring  816  and/or the user can open the loader control  762  to an open configuration. For example,  FIG.  20 B  illustrates that when the first protrusion  808   a  is engaged with the lip  812 , the arm  806  and/or one or both protrusions  808  can be deflected (e.g., pushed) in direction  826 , and once the leading edge of the first protrusion  808   a  clears the lip  812 , the spring  816  and/or the user can open the loader control  762  from the loader control first closed configuration to an open configuration (e.g., to the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ). As another example,  FIG.  20 C  illustrates that when the second protrusion  808   b  is engaged with the lip  812 , the arm  806  and/or one or both protrusions  808  can be deflected (e.g., pushed) in direction  826 , and once the leading edge of the second protrusion  808   a  clears the lip  812 , the spring  816  and/or the user can open the loader control  762  from the loader control second closed configuration to the loader control first closed configuration or directly from the loader control second closed configuration to an open configuration (e.g., to the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ). 
       FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the loader control  762  can be operated with one finger (e.g., with the thumb or any other finger). For example, the loader control  762  can be a thumb button. For example, the loader control  762  can be a thumb slide. 
       FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the loader control  762  can have a tab  828  and a space  830  for the tab  828  to slide into and out of as the loader control  762  is opened and closed.  FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  can have the tab and that the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  can have the space  830 . The space  830  can be, for example, a groove in the side of the loader control  762 .  FIG.  20 B  illustrates that the tab  828  can be in the space  830  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration.  FIG.  20 C  illustrates that the tab  828  can be in the space  830  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration. The tab  828  can keep the suture  70  aligned (e.g., centered) over the pad  796  (e.g., over the middle of the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b , over the middle of the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b ) so that the pad  796  can maintain friction on the suture  70 . The tab  828  can keep the suture  70  from interfering with the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822  or vice versa. The tab  828  can inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from contacting the spring  816  (e.g., the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822 ), for example, by inhibiting or preventing the suture  70  from migrating into contact with the spring  816  (e.g., with the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822 ) when the loader control  762  is moved, for example, along the track  764 . The tab  828  can be a barrier that can inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from moving (e.g., migrating, rolling, slipping, sliding) toward the spring  816  when the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764  when the loader control  762  is in a closed configuration (e.g., the loader control first and/or second closed configurations). For example, the tab  828  can inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from slipping away from a center of the pad  796  as the loader control  762  is moved. The tab  828  can keep the suture  70  centered over the middle of the pad  796  (e.g., centered over the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b , centered over the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b ) as the loader control  762  is moved in direction  765  away from the loader control first position and/or as the loader control  762  is moved in a direction opposite direction  765  toward the loader control first position. The pad  796  can have a higher friction than the spring  816 , so the tab  828  can inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from contacting the spring  816  (e.g., the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822 ) so that the pad  796  can maintain friction on the suture  70 . Contact between the suture  70  and the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822  can damage the suture  70 , can cause the suture  70  to lose friction with the pad  796  and slip during loading (e.g., during a high-tension part of the loading process), or both. The tab  828  can inhibit or prevent such contact with the spring  816  (e.g., with the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822 ) from occurring. The space  830  can allow the tab  828  to extend past the centerline of the pad  796  (e.g., past the centerline of the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b ) to inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from slipping underneath the tab  828  as the loader control  762  is moved. As another example, the suture  70  can contact the spring  816  (e.g., the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822 ) when the loader control  762  is moved. The tab  828  and the space  830  can align the male portion  802  with the female portion as the loader control  762  is moved from an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ) to a closed configuration (e.g., to the loader control first closed configuration shown in  FIG.  20 B  and/or to the loader control second closed configuration shown in  FIG.  20 C ). When the loader control  762  is in a closed configuration, the tab  828  can obstruct the suture  70  from translating across the pad  796  (e.g., across the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b , across the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b ). When the loader control  762  is in a closed configuration, the tab  828  can compress the suture  70  against the side of the loader control  762 . When the loader control  762  is in a closed configuration, the suture  70  can be on either lateral side of the tab  828  in the space  830 . 
       FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the ends  832  of the loader control connector  762   C  can be larger than a center (e.g., a longitudinal center) of the loader control connector  762   C . Such an arrangement can reduce the friction between the walls of the track  764  and the loader control connector  762   C  as the loader control  764  is moved in the track  764 . The ends  832  can be larger, for example, to maintain wall thickness and strength of the loader control connector  762   C  while also accommodating two posts of the mating part (e.g., two posts of the loader second side  762   SS ). For example, the loader control connector  762   C  can have two male posts that can press fit into holes (e.g., hexagon shaped holes) in the ends  832  of the loader control connector  762   C . Exemplary holes are shown, for example, in  FIGS.  20 I,  20 K, and  20 N .  FIGS.  20 I,  20 K, and  20 N  illustrate that the holes can be centered on the larger ends  832 . The ends  832  (e.g., bosses) can provide more of a bearing surface for smooth sliding in the track  764 . 
     In  FIGS.  20 A- 20 C , the loader second side  762   SS  is shown transparent for illustrative purposes only, for example, so that the loader control connector  762   C  can be easily seen. The loader control second side  762   SS  can be seen attached to or integrated with the loader control connector  762   C , for example, in  FIGS.  21 A- 21 S  (e.g., see  FIGS.  21 A- 21 H and  21 N- 21 R ). As another example, the loader control connector  762   C  can be the loader second side  762   SS . 
       FIGS.  20 A- 20 C  illustrate that the loader control  762  can be made of plastic, for example, EMERGE  7700  PC/ABS—BLACK. For example, the loader control first side  762   FS , the loader control second side  762   SS , and/or the loader control connector  762   C  can be made of EMERGE  7700  PC/ABS—BLACK. 
     As another example to the variation of the connector  800  shown in  FIGS.  20 A- 20 C , the arm  806  can have a single protrusion (e.g., only the first protrusion  808   a  or only the second protrusion  808   b ), and the female portion can have two lips  812 , for example, a first lip and a second lip spaced apart from the first lip (e.g., similar to how the first and second protrusions  808   a ,  808   b  are spaced apart) such that the single protrusion can engage and disengage with the first and second lips. 
       FIGS.  20 D- 20 H  illustrate that the loader control  762  (e.g., the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 ) can have the dimensions and the arrangement of features shown. The pad  796  (e.g., the pad first side  796   a , the first pad  777   a ) is shown transparent in  FIGS.  20 D- 20 H  for illustrative purposes only. 
       FIG.  20 D  illustrates that the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  can have the shape shown when viewed from above. The shape shown in  FIG.  20 D  can be, for example, a kidney bean shape 
       FIG.  20 E  illustrates the arrangement of features shown, for example, with exemplary dimensions D 1 -D 3 . 
       FIG.  20 E  illustrates that dimension D 1  can be the distance (e.g., length) between the leading edge of the first protrusion  808   a  and the leading edge of the second protrusion  808   b . Dimension D 1  can be, for example, from about 0.000 inches to about 0.025 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.003 inches to about 0.013 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.000 inches, 0.003 inches, 0.008 inches, 0.013 inches, 0.025 inches). 
       FIG.  20 E  illustrates that dimension D 2  can be the distance (e.g., length) between the leading edge of the first protrusion  808   a  and the center of the channel  825 . Dimension D 2  can be, for example, from about 0.500 inches to about 1.000 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.669 inches to about 0.773 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.500 inches, 0.669 inches, 0.771 inches, 0.773 inches, 1.000 inches). 
       FIG.  20 E  illustrates that dimension D 3  can be the diameter of the channel  825 . Dimension D 3  can be, for example, from about 0.0475 inches to about 0.0485 inches, including every 0.0001 inch increment within this range (e.g., 0.0475 inches, 0.0480 inches, 0.0485 inches). 
       FIG.  20 F  illustrates the arrangement of features shown, for example, with exemplary dimensions D 4  and D 5 . 
       FIG.  20 F  illustrates that dimension D 4  can be the distance (e.g., height) between a base of the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  and the leading edge of the second protrusion  808   b . Dimension D 4  can be, for example, from about 0.100 inches to about 0.160 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.127 inches to about 0.131 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.100 inches, 0.127 inches, 0.129 inches, 0.131 inches, 0.160 inches). 
       FIG.  20 F  illustrates that dimension D 5  can be the distance (e.g., height) between a base of the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  and the leading edge of the first protrusion  808   a . Dimension D 5  can be, for example, from about 0.130 inches to about 0.190 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.162 inches to about 0.166 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.130 inches, 0.162 inches, 0.164 inches, 0.166 inches, 0.190 inches). 
       FIG.  20 G  illustrates the arrangement of features shown. 
       FIG.  20 H  illustrates the arrangement of features shown. 
       FIGS.  20 I- 20 O  illustrate that the loader control  762  (e.g., the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 ) can have the dimensions and the arrangement of features shown. The pad  796  (e.g., the pad second side  796   b , the second pad  777   b ) is shown transparent in  FIGS.  20 I- 20 O  for illustrative purposes only. 
       FIG.  20 I  illustrates the arrangement of features shown, for example, with exemplary dimension D 6 . 
       FIG.  20 I  illustrates that the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  can have the shape shown when viewed from below. The shape shown in  FIG.  20 D  can be, for example, a kidney bean shape.  FIG.  20 I  illustrates that the loader control connector  762   C  can extend from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . The loader control connector  762   C  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . 
       FIG.  20 I  illustrates that dimension D 6  can be the distance (e.g., length) between the center of the two ends  832  of the loader control connector  762   C . Dimension D 6  can be, for example, from about 0.350 inches to about 0.650 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.498 inches to about 0.502 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.350 inches, 0.498 inches, 0.500 inches, 0.502 inches, 0.650 inches). 
       FIG.  20 J  illustrates the arrangement of features shown, for example, with exemplary dimensions D 7  and D 8 . 
       FIG.  20 J  illustrates that dimension D 7  can be the distance (e.g., height) between a base of the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  and the leading edge of the base of the loader control connector  762   C . Dimension D 7  can be, for example, from about 0.100 inches to about 0.200 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.153 inches to about 0.159 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.100 inches, 0.153 inches, 0.156 inches, 0.159 inches, 0.200 inches). 
       FIG.  20 J  illustrates that dimension D 8  can be the diameter of the channel  829 . Dimension D 8  can be, for example, from about 0.0455 inches to about 0.0465 inches, including every 0.0001 inch increment within this range (e.g., 0.0455 inches, 0.0460 inches, 0.0465 inches). 
       FIG.  20 K  illustrates the arrangement of features shown, for example, with exemplary dimension D 9  and the angle and other dimensions shown. 
       FIG.  20 K  illustrates that the ends  832  of the loader control connector  762   C  can be hollow, for example, so that the loader control second side  762   SS  can be attached or removably attached to the loader control connector  762   C . For example, the loader control second side  762   SS  can have extensions that can be insertable into the ends  832  of the loader control connector  762   C . The loader control second side  762   SS  can be attached to the loader control connector  762   C , for example, with a snap fit, a friction fit, with an adhesive (e.g., glue), or any combination thereof.  FIGS.  20 I and  20 K  illustrate that the ends  832  can have holes, for example, hexagon-shaped holes. The extensions on the loader control second side  762   SS  can be round. The hexagon-shaped holes can allow for a wider diameter range of extensions (e.g., round posts) to still provide a press fit, as hexagon-shaped holes can provide some room for the extension to deform into.  FIG.  20 K  illustrates that dimension D 9  can be the distance (e.g., depth) of the hollow portion of the ends  832  of the loader control connector  762 . Dimension D 9  can be, for example, from about 0.100 inches to about 0.200 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.140 inches to about 0.160 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.100 inches, 0.140 inches, 0.150 inches, 0.160 inches, 0.200 inches). 
       FIGS.  20 I- 20 K  illustrate that the portion of the loader control connector  762   C  between the two ends  832  can be a fin that can connect the ends  832 . The fin can provide stiffness to the loader control connector  762   C . The fin can contact the walls of the track  764 . As another example, the fin may not contact the walls of the track  764 . 
     The loader control connector  762   C  can be removably attachable to or integrated with the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., to the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 ). For example,  FIG.  20 K  illustrates that the loader control connector  762   C  can be integrated with the loader control first side  762   FS  (e.g., with the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 ). 
       FIG.  20 L  illustrates the arrangement of features shown, for example, with exemplary dimensions D 11 , D 12 , and the angle and other dimensions shown. 
       FIG.  20 L  illustrates that dimension D 11  can be the distance (e.g., width) between the two arms  827 , for example, as measured between the two arms  827  at the bottom of the draft shown in in  FIG.  20 L . Dimension D 11  can be, for example, from about 0.160 inches to about 0.260 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.208 inches to about 0.212 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.160 inches, 0.208 inches, 0.210 inches, 0.212 inches, 0.260 inches). 
       FIG.  20 L  illustrates that dimension D 12  can be, for example, from about 0.060 inches to about 0.090 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.070 inches to about 0.080 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.060 inches, 0.070 inches, 0.075 inches, 0.080 inches, 0.090 inches). 
       FIG.  20 M  illustrates the arrangement of features shown. 
       FIG.  20 N  illustrates the arrangement of features shown, for example, with exemplary dimension D 13 . 
       FIG.  20 N  illustrates that dimension D 13  can be the distance (e.g., length) between the center of the channel  829  and a terminal end of the lip  812  (e.g., a proximal terminal end of the lip  812 ). Dimension D 13  can be, for example, from about 0.300 inches to about 0.700 inches, or more narrowly from about 0.750 inches to about 0.760 inches, including every 0.001 inch increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.300 inches, 0.750 inches, 0.756 inches, 0.760 inches, 0.700 inches). 
       FIG.  20 O  illustrates the arrangement of features shown. 
     The loader  750  can load and/or unload shuttles  14  having males stops  412  (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, or more male stops  412 ) into and out of the device  188 . The loader  750  can, for example, load and/or unload shuttles  14  having radial male stops  412 . The loader  750  can, for example, load and/or unload shuttles  14  having lateral male stops  412 . The loader  750  can, for example, load and/or unload shuttles  14  having one or more radial male stops  412  (e.g., one or two radial male stops  412 ) and one or more lateral male stops  412  (e.g., one or two lateral male stops  412 ). For example, the loader  750  can load and/or unload shuttles  14  having any combination of the males stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 G . For example,  FIGS.  14 A- 18    illustrate that the loader  750  can load and unload shuttles  14  having two male stops  412 , for example, the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 D and  11 E . As another example, the loader  750  can load and/or unload shuttles  14  having two male stops  412 , for example, the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 C . As yet another example,  FIGS.  21 A- 21 S  illustrate that the loader  750  can load and/or unload shuttles  14  having two male stops  412 , for example, the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G . As another example, the loader  750  can load and/or unload shuttles  14  having zero males stops  412  into and out of the device  188 . In such cases, the device  188  may have zero female stops  416  or a shuttle  14  having zero male stops  412  can be loaded into a device  188  having female stops  416  (e.g., the first female stop  416   a  and/or the second female stop  416   b ). 
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 D  illustrate, for example, that the loader  750  can load shuttles  14  having one or more lateral male stops  412 . For example, the shuttle  14  illustrated in  FIGS.  21 A- 21 S  can be the shuttle  14  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G .  FIGS.  21 A- 21 D  illustrate, for example, that the loader  750  can load suture  70  that is attached to a shuttle  14  having zero, one, or more lateral male stops  412 . 
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 D  illustrate that the loader  750  can have the arrangement of features shown when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  21 A ), when the loader control  762  is in a loader control intermediate position between the loader control first and second positions (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  21 B ), when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position and the suture holder  795  is in a closed configuration (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  21 C ), and when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position and the suture holder  795  is in an open configuration (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  21 D ). The closed and open configurations of the suture holder  795  can correspond to the closed and open configurations of the loader control  762 , respectively. The closed configuration in  FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  of the suture holder  795  can be, for example, the loader control first closed configuration or the loader control second closed configuration. For example, the suture holder  795  can have a suture holder first closed configuration, where the suture holder first closed configuration can be the loader control first closed configuration, and the suture holder  795  can have a suture holder second closed configuration, where the suture holder second closed configuration can be the loader control second closed configuration.  FIG.  21 B  illustrates exemplary loader control first, second, and third positions as marked by position P 1 , position P 2 , and position P 3 , respectively. The loader control first position can correspond to a non-loaded position of the shuttle  14 . The loader control second position can correspond to a fully loaded position of the shuttle  14 . The loader control third position can correspond to an overloaded position of the shuttle  14 . As another example, the position of the loader control  762  in  FIGS.  21 C and  21 D  can be the loader control second position such that the shuttle  14  may not have an overloaded position. 
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  illustrate that the suture  70  can extend through the suture holder  795 , for example, between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  or between the pad first and second sides  796   a ,  796   b  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  964  during loading and/or during unloading. For example,  FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  illustrate that the suture  70  can be clamped between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  964  in direction  965  from the loader control first position to the loader control third position.  FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  illustrate that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the suture holder  795  can inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from sliding and/or rolling between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  as the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764  in direction  965  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position.  FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  illustrate that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the loader control threshold force can be reached or exceeded at the loader control second position such that the suture  70  can slide and/or roll between the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b  as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position to inhibit or prevent the suture  70  from stretching, breaking, or fraying as the shuttle  14  is moved into a loaded or overloaded position into the device  188  by moving the loader control  762  from the loader control second position to the loader control third position.  FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  illustrate, for example, that the length of the suture  70  between the loader control  762  and the shuttle  14  can be longer in the when the loader control  762  is beyond the loader control second position (e.g., in the loader control third position) than when the loader control  762  is between the loader control first and second positions.  FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  illustrate that the length of the suture  70  between the loader control  762  and the shuttle  14  can be constant as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second position. The length of the suture  70  between the loader control  762  and the shuttle  14  can progressively increase as the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control second position to the loader control third position, for example, as the suture  70  slips through suture holder  795 . 
       FIG.  21 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can have the loader control first closed configuration and  FIGS.  21 B and  21 C  illustrate that the loader control can have the loader control second closed configuration.  FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  illustrate that before the loader control  762  is moved from the loader control first position to the loader control second or third position in direction  765 , the configuration of the loader control  762  can be changed from the loader control first closed configuration to the loader control second closed configuration. The loader control  762  can be changed from the loader control first closed configuration to the loader control second closed configuration, for example, by the user pressing the loader control first side  762   FS  toward the loader control second side  762   SS , by the user pressing the loader control second side  762   SS  toward the loader control first side  762   FS , by squeezing the loader control  762 , by moving the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  toward the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 , by moving the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2  toward the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1 , or any combination thereof. As another example,  FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  illustrate that the loader control  762  can have the loader control second closed configuration. 
       FIG.  21 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can be packaged without the device  188  in the device space  752 . 
       FIG.  21 A  illustrates that the loader  750  can have an opener  834  that can open the loader control  762  from a closed configuration, for example, by engaging with the connector when the loader control  762  is moved along the track  764 . The opener  834  can open the loader control  762  from the loader control first closed configuration. The opener  834  can open the loader control  762  from the loader control second closed configuration. The opener  834  can be, for example, an extension, a tab, a protrusion, or any combination thereof. The opener  834  can be attached to or integrated with the loader control body  751 . The opener  834  can extend from the loader body  751 , for example, into the track  764 . The opener  834  can be flexible or rigid. The opener  834  can be positioned anywhere along the length of the track  764 . For example,  FIG.  21 A  illustrates that the opener  834  can extend from a terminal end of the track  764  such that the loader control  762  can be moved (e.g., pushed and/or pulled) into the opener  834  as the loader control  762  is moved into the loader control second or third position.  FIG.  21 A  illustrates that the loader control  762  can be moveable relative to the opener  834 . For example,  FIG.  21 A  illustrates that the opener  834  can be in a fixed position. 
     When the loader control  762  is moved into the opener  834 , for example, in direction  765  along the track  764 , the connector  800  can be moved into contact with the opener  834  in direction  765 . When the loader control  762  is moved into the opener  834 , the opener  834  can move (e.g., push) the male portion  802  out of engagement with the female portion  804  or vice versa. When the loader control  762  is moved into the opener  834 , the opener  834  can release the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  or vice versa. For example,  FIG.  21 C  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is moved into the opener  834 , the opener  834  can move (e.g., push) the male portion  802  in direction  826 . This can disengage the male portion  802  from the female portion  804 , for example, by deflecting the arm  806  and/or the protrusions  808  in direction  826 . Once the male portion  802  is disengaged from the female portion  804 , the spring  816  can open the loader control  762 , for example, when the user lets go of the loader control  762  and/or the user can open the loader control  762 . The disengagement of the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  caused by the opener  834  can provide audible and/or tactile feedback that can indicate to the user that the shuttle  14  is fully loaded into the device  188  and/or that the loader control  762  has been moved to the end of the track  764  and that they can release the loader control  762 .  FIG.  21 D  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position and the user releases the loader control  762 , the loader control  962  can automatically open via the spring  816 . 
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 D  illustrate, for example, that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration and is moved into the opener  834  in direction  765 , the arm  806  and/or first protrusion  808   a  can be moved (e.g., pushed) by the opener  834  in direction  826  to disengage the male portion  802  from the female portion  804 . Once the male portion  802  is disengaged from the female portion  804 , the spring  816  can open the loader control  762  from the loader control first closed configuration to an open configuration (e.g., to the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A or  21 D ). In this way, the loader control  762  can be passively and/or automatically opened from a closed configuration (e.g., the loader control first closed configuration), for example, by moving the connector  800  into the opener  834 .  FIGS.  21 C and  21 D  illustrate, for example, that when the male portion  802  has been disengaged from the female portion  804  via the opener  834  and the user lets go of the loader control  762  (e.g., the user is shown transparent in  FIGS.  21 A- 21 D ), the loader control  762  can automatically open. For example, the spring  816  can flip open the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  away from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . As another example, once the user lets go of the loader control  762 , the male portion  802  can remain disengaged from the female portion  804  but the loader control  962  may not flip open. In such variations, the male portion  802  can be disengaged from the female portion  804  but the user can manually open the loader control  762 . 
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 D  illustrate, for example, that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration and is moved into the opener  834  in direction  765 , the arm  806 , the first protrusion  808   a , and/or the second protrusion  808   b  can be moved (e.g., pushed) by the opener  834  in direction  826  to disengage the male portion  802  from the female portion  804 . Once the male portion  802  is disengaged from the female portion  804 , the spring  816  can open the loader control  762  from the loader control second closed configuration to an open configuration (e.g., to the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A or  21 D ). In this way, the loader control  762  can be passively and/or automatically opened from a closed configuration (e.g., the loader control second closed configuration), for example, by moving the connector  800  into the opener  834 .  FIGS.  21 C and  21 D  illustrate, for example, that when the male portion  802  has been disengaged from the female portion  804  via the opener  834  and the user lets go of the loader control  762  (e.g., the user is shown transparent in  FIGS.  21 A- 21 D ), the loader control  762  can automatically open. For example, the spring  816  can flip open the loader control first side first portion  762   FS1  away from the loader control first side second portion  762   FS2 . As another example, once the user lets go of the loader control  762 , the male portion  802  can remain disengaged from the female portion  804  but the loader control  962  may not flip open. In such variations, the male portion  802  can be disengaged from the female portion  804  but the user can manually open the loader control  762 . 
       FIG.  21 C  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the connector  800  can be engaged with the opener  834  and the loader control first side  762   FS  can hang over the opener  834 . 
       FIG.  21 D  illustrates the loader control  762  in an open configuration in the loader control third position after having been automatically opened by the opener  834  and released by the user. 
       FIG.  21 C  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position and the loader control  762  is in a closed configuration, the suture  70  can extend diagonally across the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b.    
       FIG.  21 D  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position and the loader control  762  is in an open configuration, the suture  70  can extend diagonally across the second pad  777   b.    
       FIG.  21 D  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in an open configuration, the spring first arm  820  can contact the first pad  777   a  and the spring second arm  822  can contact the second pad  777   b.    
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 D  illustrate that the user can choose to load the shuttle  14  to the shuttle second position or to the shuttle third position by moving the loader control  762  to the loader control second position or to the loader control third position. If the user chooses to load the shuttle  14  to the shuttle second position (e.g., a non-overloaded position of shuttle  14 ), the user can manually open the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position by releasing the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  (e.g., by moving the male portion  802  in direction  826 ). If the user chooses to load the shuttle  14  to the shuttle third position (e.g., an overloaded position of the shuttle  14 ), the opener  834  can release the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position and the loader control  762  can automatically open once the user releases the loader control  762 . As another example, if the user chooses to load the shuttle  14  to a shuttle position between the shuttle second and third positions, the user can move the loader control  762  to a loader control position between the loader control second and third positions and can manually open the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is between the loader control second and third positions by releasing the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  (e.g., by moving the male portion  802  in direction  826 ). 
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 D  illustrate that the cap  758  can be opaque. 
       FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the cap  58  can be transparent. 
       FIGS.  21 A and  21 E  illustrate that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the shuttle  14  can be completely under the cap  758 . 
       FIG.  21 B  illustrates that when the loader control  762  is in a loader control position between the loader control first position and the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  can be partially outside of the cap  758 , for example, in and/or above the first jaw space  752   a.    
       FIGS.  21 C and  21 D  illustrate that when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second or third position, the shuttle  14  can be completely outside the cap  758 , for example, in and/or above the first jaw space  752   a.    
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 E  illustrate that the male stops  412  can be movable in the tracks  756  and  760 . For example,  FIGS.  21 A- 21 E  illustrate that the first male stop  412   a  (e.g., a first lateral male stop) can be movable in the track  756  and the second male stop  412   b  (e.g., a second lateral male stop) can be movable in the track  760  or vice versa. 
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 E  illustrate, for example, that as the shuttle  14  is moved along the tracks  756  and  760  during loading and/or unloading, the first male stop  412   a  (e.g., a first lateral male stop) can move in the track  756  and the second male stop  412   b  (e.g., a second lateral male stop) can move in the track  760 .  FIGS.  21 A- 21 E  illustrate, for example, that as the shuttle  14  is moved along the tracks  756  and  760  during loading and/or unloading, the first male stop  412   a  can move along the track  756  and the second male stop  412   b  can move along the track  760 . 
     When a device (e.g., the device  188 ) is in the device space  752 , the first male stop  412   a  can be movable from the track  756  into the jaw track that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ). When a device (e.g., the device  188 ) is in the device space  752 , the second male stop  412   b  can be movable from the track  760  into the jaw track that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ). The first male stop  412   a  can be moved into the device  188  before the second male stop  412   b  or vice versa. 
       FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the loader  750  can have a deflector  836 . The shuttle  14  can be movable into the deflector  836  or vice versa, for example, during loading. The shuttle  14  can be movable against the deflector  836  or vice versa, for example, during loading. The deflector  836  can contract the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . For example, the deflector  836  can contract one or both ends of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . The deflector  836  can decrease a width of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . For example, the deflector  836  can decrease a width of one or both ends of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . The deflector  836  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . As another example, the deflector  836  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  toward a longitudinal axis (e.g., a center longitudinal axis) of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . The deflector  836  can deflect the shuttle  14  from a shuttle non-contracted configuration (also referred to as a non-contracted configuration) to a shuttle contracted configuration (also referred to as a contracted configuration), for example, during loading of the shuttle  14  into the device. The deflector  836  can deflect the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  from a non-deflected configuration to a deflected configuration, for example, during loading of the shuttle  14  into the device. When the shuttle  14  has a non-contracted configuration, the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can have a non-deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  has a contracted configuration, the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can have a deflected configuration. The deflector  836  can, for example, contract one or both ends of the shuttle  14  from a non-contracted configuration to a contracted configuration as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . For example, the deflector  836  can deflect the leading male stop  412  from a non-contracted configuration to a contracted configuration and/or the trailing male stop  412  from a non-contracted configuration to a contracted configuration as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . 
     The deflector  836  can extend into the path (e.g., loading path) of the shuttle  14 . The deflector  836  can obstruct the path of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  such that when the shuttle  14  is moved against the deflector  836 , the shuttle  14  can contract. For example, the deflector  836  can obstruct the path (e.g., loading path) of the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  such that when the shuttle  14  is loaded, the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  can engage with the deflector  836  which can move (e.g., deflect) the leading male stop and/or trailing male stop  412  toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . 
     The deflector  836  can be, for example, a protrusion that extends into the path (e.g., loading path) of the shuttle  14 . The deflector  836  can be, for example, a protrusion that narrows the path (e.g., loading path) of the shuttle  14 . The shuttle  14  can be movable past the deflector  836  during loading and/or during unloading.  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the deflector  836  can be a ramp. The track  756  and/or the track  760  can have the deflector  836 . For example,  FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the track  760  can have the deflector  836 . The deflector  836  can be, for example, a tapered surface of the track  756  and/or a tapered surface of the track  760 . For example,  FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the deflector  836  can be a tapered surface of the track  760 . The deflector  836  can be, for example, a surface of the loader body and/or a surface of the cap  758 . For example,  FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the deflector  836  can be a surface of the cap  758 . The deflector  836  can be anywhere along the length of the track  756  and/or the track  760 . The deflector  836  can define a longitudinal end of the track  756  and/or the track  760 , for example, the longitudinal end of the track  756  or the track  760  that is closest to the entrance of the jaw track that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ) when the device  188  is in the device space  752 . For example,  FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the deflector  836  can define a longitudinal end of the track  760 . The track  756  and/or the track  760  can thereby have a tapered end. The tapered end can form a wedge that can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 .  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the track  760  can have the deflector  836  such that the deflector  836  can be a tapered surface of the track  760 . The deflector  836  can be, for example, a tapered portion of the base of the track  760 .  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the deflector  836  can be a tapered surface of the cap  758 . 
     During loading, the leading male stop  412  can be the first male stop  412  that is moved into the device  188 , and the trailing male stop  412  can be the second male stop  412  that is moved into the device  188 . The deflector  836  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412 , for example, toward a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into the device  188  via the user moving the loader control  762  in direction  765  and/or via the user pulling directly on the suture  70 . 
       FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b  can be on opposite longitudinal ends and on opposite lateral sides of the shuttle  14 , for example, as shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G . For example, the first male stop  412   a  can be on a shuttle first longitudinal end and on a shuttle first lateral side, and the second male stop  412   b  can be on a shuttle second longitudinal end and on a shuttle second lateral side. The shuttle first longitudinal end can be opposite the shuttle second longitudinal end. The shuttle first lateral side can be opposite the shuttle second lateral side.  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) can ride in the track  756  and that the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) can ride in the track  760 , or vice versa.  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) can be moveable in the track  756  and that the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) can be movable in the track  760 , or vice versa. For example,  FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the first male stop  412   a  can extend toward the base of the track  756  and that the second male stop  412   b  can extend away from the base of the track  756 .  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the first male stop  412   a  can extend away from the base of the track  760  and that the second male stop  412   b  can extend toward the base of the track  760 . In such variations, the deflector  836  can deflect the leading male stop  412  or the trailing male stop  412 . For example,  FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the deflector  836  can deflect the trailing male stop  412 —which  FIG.  21 E  illustrates can be the second male stop  412   b —as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . For example,  FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the deflector  836  can deflect the trailing male stop  412  but not the leading male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . As another example, the first male stop  412   a  can be on a shuttle first longitudinal end and on a shuttle first lateral side, and the second male stop  412   b  can be on a shuttle second longitudinal end and on the shuttle first lateral side such that both the first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can ride in the track  756  or in the track  760 . 
     As a first example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIG.  21 E ), the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  can have a non-deflected configuration. For example, during loading, as the male stops  412  enter the device  188  as the shuttle  14  is moved into the device  188 , the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  can be moved from the non-deflected configuration to a deflected configuration via the deflector  836 .  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the deflector  836  can deflect the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., from the non-deflected configuration to the deflected configuration) but may not deflect the leading male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . The male stops  412  can be closer to a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  when the male stops  412  are in the deflected configuration than when in the non-deflected configuration. The defected configuration of the male stops  412  can be, for example, a contracted configuration of the male stops  412 . In such variations, the male stops  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ) can have a non-deflected configuration when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIG.  21 E ), the male stops  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ) can have the deflected configuration (e.g., a fully deflected configuration) when in a jaw track (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ), for example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the male stops  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ) can have a less deflected configuration (e.g., a partially deflected configuration or the non-deflected configuration) when in a female stop  416 , or any combination thereof.  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can have the non-deflected configuration. The non-deflected configuration of the male stops  412  can be, for example, the configuration of the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G . 
     As a second example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIG.  21 E ), the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  can have a partially deflected configuration. For example, during loading, as the male stops  412  enter the device  188  as the shuttle  14  is moved into the device  188 , the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  can be moved from a first deflected configuration to a second deflected configuration via the deflector  836 .  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the deflector  836  can deflect the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., from the first deflected configuration to the second deflected configuration) but may not deflect the leading male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . The male stops  412  can be closer to the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  when the male stops  412  are in the second deflected configuration than when in the first deflected configuration. The first deflected configuration can be, for example, a partially deflected configuration and the second deflected configuration can be, for example, a more deflected (e.g., a fully deflected) configuration. In such variations, the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can have the first deflected configuration when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIG.  21 E ), the male stops  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ) can have the second deflected configuration when in a jaw track (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ), for example, when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the male stops  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ) can have less deflected configuration than the second deflected configuration (e.g., the non-deflected configuration, the first deflected configuration) when in a female stop  416 , or any combination thereof. The first and second deflected configurations of the male stops  412  can be, for example, configurations of the male stops  412  shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G  when the male stops  412  are deflected toward the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . 
     As the shuttle  14  is moved into the device  188  from the shuttle first position,  FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the deflector  836  can deflect the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) toward the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . Deflecting the trailing male stop  412  toward the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  via the deflector  836  can move the trailing male stop  412  toward the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . Deflecting the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) via the deflector  836  can inhibit or prevent the trailing male stop  412  from catching on the tip of the jaw (e.g., the tip of the lower jaw  38  or the tip of the upper jaw  30 ) that is in the first jaw space  752   a  as the trailing male stop  412  is moved into the device  188 . Deflecting the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) via the deflector  836  can inhibit or prevent the jaw (e.g., the lower jaw  38  or the upper jaw  30 ) that is in the first jaw space  752   a  from obstructing the trailing male stop  412  from being moved into the device  188  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . Deflecting the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) via the deflector  836  can make the trailing end of the shuttle  14  (e.g., the side of the shuttle  14  having the trailing male stop  412 ) small enough to fit into the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a . For example, deflecting the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) via the deflector  836  can reduce the width trailing end of the shuttle  14  (e.g., the transverse width of the shuttle  14  perpendicular to the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 ) by about 0.50 mm to about 5.00 mm, or more narrowly, by about 0.50 mm to about 3.00 mm, including every 0.01 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.50 mm, 1.00 mm, 2.00 mm, 3.00 mm, 5.00 mm). Deflecting the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) via the deflector  836  can reduce the amount of force required to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . For variations in which the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  have a partially deflected configuration (e.g., the first deflected configuration) when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIG.  21 E ), loading the shuttle  14  from a position in which one or both of the male stops  412  have a deflected configuration can reduce the force required to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . 
     Once the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) is in the device  188 , the leading male stop  412  may or may not become engaged with a female stop  416  that is in the jaw in the first device space  752   a  (e.g., the female stop  416  in upper jaw  30  or the female stop in the lower jaw  38 ) as the shuttle  14  is moved further into the device  188 . Once the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) is in the device  188 , the trailing male stop  412  may or may not become engaged with a female stop  416  that is in the jaw in the first device space  752   a  (e.g., the female stop  416  in upper jaw  30  or the female stop  416  in the lower jaw  38 ) as the shuttle  14  is moved further into the device  188 . For example,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that as the shuttle  14  is moved further into the device  188 , the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) can become engaged with a female stop  416  that is in the jaw in the first device space  752   a  and the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) may not become engaged with a female stop  416  that is in the jaw in the first device space  752   a  such that the trailing male stop  412  can be in or can remain in a deflected configuration when the shuttle  14  is fully loaded into the device  188  (e.g., when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second or third position). The leading male stop  412  can move (e.g., automatically move) from the deflected configuration to the non-deflected configuration or to a less deflected configuration when the leading male stop  412  becomes engaged with the female stop  416 . For variations in which the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) can become engaged with a female stop  416  during loading, the trailing male stop  412  can move (e.g., automatically move) from the deflected configuration to the non-deflected configuration or to a less deflected configuration when the trailing male stop  412  becomes engaged with the female stop  416 . The male stops  412  can, for example, be springs that are biased to have the non-deflected configuration (e.g., the configuration shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G ). 
     As another example, the loader  750  (e.g., the cap  758 ) may not have the deflector  836 . For example, the track  756  may not have the deflector  836 . For example, the track  760  may not have the deflector  836 . The shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  with or without the deflector  836 . The male stops  412  can be moved into the device  188  with or without the deflector  836 . The male stops  412  can be moved into the device  188  with or without deflecting the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412 . The male stops  412  can be moved into the device  188  with or without deflecting the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  with a ramp (e.g., the deflector  836 ). For example, the male stops  412  can be moved into the device  188  with or without deflecting the trailing male stop  412 . As another example, the deflector  836  can be attached to or integrated with the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a . As yet another example, the shape of the tip of the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . As still yet another example, the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  can have a first ramp and the loader (e.g., the cap  758 ) can have a second ramp (e.g., the deflector  836 ). 
       FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the deflector  836  can face the track  756 , for example, a base of the track  756 . 
       FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate that the ends of the track  756  can be wider than the center of the track  756 . As another example, the track  756  can have a uniform width from end to end.  FIG.  21 E  illustrates that the ends of the track  760  can be wider than the center of the track  760 . As another example, the track  760  can have a uniform width from end to end. 
       FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the female stops  416  can be lateral female stops  416 . For example,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the first female stop  416   a  can be a first lateral female stop and that the second female stop  416   b  can be a second lateral female stop.  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the upper jaw  30  can have the first female stop  416   a  and that the lower jaw  38  can have the second female stop  416   b  or vice versa. The lateral female stops  416  can extend laterally away from the shuttle tracks in the jaws. The first female stop  416   a  can, for example, extend laterally away from the upper jaw track  64 . The second female stop  416   b  can, for example, extend laterally away from the lower jaw track  66 . The first and second female stops  416   a ,  416   b  can extend in opposite lateral directions, for example, so that the first male stop  412   a  can be engageable with the first female stop  416   a  and so that the second male stop  412   b  can be engageable with the second female stop  416   b . For example,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that when the upper jaw  30  is in the first jaw space  752   a  and when the lower jaw  38  is in the second jaw space  752   a , the first female stop  416   a  can be closer to the loader body  751  than the second female stop  416   b . Only a portion of the upper jaw  30  and only a portion of the lower jaw  38  are shown transparent in  FIG.  21 H  so that the female stops  416  can be seen. Only a portion of the upper jaw  30  and only a portion of the lower jaw  38  are shown transparent in  FIG.  21 H  so that the lateral orientation of the female stops  416  can be seen. 
       FIG.  21 F  illustrates that the device  188  can be placed in the device space  752  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position and the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position. The loader control  762  can be in a loader control open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  20 A ), the loader control first closed configuration, or the loader control second closed configuration when the device  188  is placed in the device space  752 . For example,  FIG.  21 F  illustrates that the loader control  762  can be in the loader control first closed configuration when the device  188  is placed in the device space  752 . 
       FIG.  21 F  illustrates that the lower jaw  38  can have a tissue guide  837  and that the upper jaw  30  may not have a tissue guide  837  or vice versa. As another example, both jaws can have a tissue guide  837 . The tissue guides  837  can be a wedge or a tapered surface that can guide tissue between the jaws, for example, as the jaws are advanced by the user against tissue that the user would like to pass suture through. The tissue guides  837  can be attached to or integrated with one of the jaws.  FIGS.  21 A- 21 F  illustrate that the first jaw space  752   a  and the second jaw space  752   b  can be sized and shaped to receive the tissue guides  837  on one or both jaws. 
       FIG.  21 G  illustrates the loader  750  without the cap  758  so that the shuttle  14  can be seen while in the shuttle first position before the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  or after the shuttle  14  is unloaded from the device  188 .  FIG.  21 G  illustrates that when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle  14  can be completely outside of the device  188 , for example, between the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38 . 
       FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the loader  750  can have a deflector  838 . The shuttle  14  can be movable into the deflector  838  or vice versa, for example, during loading. The shuttle  14  can be movable against the deflector  838  or vice versa, for example, during loading. The deflector  838  can contract the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . For example, the deflector  838  can contract one or both ends of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . The deflector  838  can decrease a width of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . For example, the deflector  838  can decrease a width of one or both ends of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . For example, the deflector  838  can deflect the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . The deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . As another example, the deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  toward a longitudinal axis (e.g., a center longitudinal axis) of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . The deflector  838  can deflect the shuttle  14  from a shuttle non-contracted configuration (also referred to as a non-contracted configuration) to a shuttle contracted configuration (also referred to as a contracted configuration), for example, during loading of the shuttle  14  into the device. The deflector  838  can deflect the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  from a non-deflected configuration to a deflected configuration, for example, during loading of the shuttle  14  into the device. When the shuttle  14  has a non-contracted configuration, the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can have a non-deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  has a contracted configuration, the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can have a deflected configuration. The deflector  838  can, for example, contract one or both ends of the shuttle  14  from a non-contracted configuration to a contracted configuration as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . For example, the deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412  from a non-contracted configuration to a contracted configuration and/or the trailing male stop  412  from a non-contracted configuration to a contracted configuration as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 . 
     The deflector  838  can extend into the path (e.g., loading path) of the shuttle  14 . The deflector  838  can obstruct the path of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  such that when the shuttle  14  is moved against the deflector  838 , the shuttle  14  can contract. For example, the deflector  838  can obstruct the path (e.g., loading path) of the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  such that when the shuttle  14  is loaded, the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  can engage with the deflector  838  which can move (e.g., deflect) the leading male stop and/or trailing male stop  412  toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . 
     The deflector  838  can be, for example, a protrusion that extends into the path (e.g., loading path) of the shuttle  14 . The deflector  838  can be, for example, a protrusion that narrows the path (e.g., loading path) of the shuttle  14 . The shuttle  14  can be movable past the deflector  838  during loading and/or during unloading.  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the deflector  838  can be a ramp. The track  756  and/or the track  760  can have the deflector  838 . For example,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the track  756  can have the deflector  838 . The deflector  838  can be, for example, a tapered surface of the track  756  and/or a tapered surface of the track  760 . For example,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the deflector  838  can be a tapered surface of the track  756 . The deflector  838  can be, for example, a surface of the loader body  751  and/or a surface of the cap  758 . For example,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the deflector  838  can be a surface of the loader body  751 . The deflector  838  can be anywhere along the length of the track  756  and/or the track  760 . The deflector  838  can define a longitudinal end of the track  756  and/or the track  760 , for example, the longitudinal end of the track  756  or the track that is closest to the entrance of the jaw track that is in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw track  64  or the lower jaw track  66 ) when the device  188  is in the device space  752 . For example,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the deflector  838  can define a longitudinal end of the track  756 . The track  756  and/or the track  760  can thereby have a tapered end. The tapered end can form a wedge that can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop as the shuttle  14  is moved into (e.g., loaded into) the device  188 .  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the track  756  can have the deflector  838  such that the deflector  838  can be a tapered surface of the track  756 . The deflector  838  can be, for example, a tapered portion of the base of the track  756 .  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the deflector  838  can be a tapered surface of the loader body  751 . 
     During loading, the leading male stop  412  can be the first male stop  412  that is moved into the device  188 , and the trailing male stop  412  can be the second male stop  412  that is moved into the device  188 . The deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412 , for example, toward the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  is moved into the device  188  via the user moving the loader control  762  in direction  765  and/or via the user pulling directly on the suture  70 . 
       FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b  can be on opposite longitudinal ends and on opposite lateral sides of the shuttle  14 , for example, as shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G . For example, the first male stop  412   a  can be on a shuttle first longitudinal end and on a shuttle first lateral side, and the second male stop  412   b  can be on a shuttle second longitudinal end and on a shuttle second lateral side. The shuttle first longitudinal end can be opposite the shuttle second longitudinal end. The shuttle first lateral side can be opposite the shuttle second lateral side.  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the first male stop  412   a  can extend toward the base of the track  756  and that the second male stop  412   b  can extend away from the base of the track  756 .  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the first male stop  412   a  can extend away from the base of the track  760  and that the second male stop  412   b  can extend toward the base of the track  760 . In such variations, the deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412  or the trailing male stop  412 . For example,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412 —which  FIG.  21 H  illustrates can be the first male stop  412   a —as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . For example,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412  but not the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . 
     As a first example, as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  from the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIG.  21 E ), the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  can be moved from the non-deflected configuration to the deflected configuration via the deflector  838 .  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412  (e.g., from the non-deflected configuration to the deflected configuration) but may not deflect the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . 
     As a second example, as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  from the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIG.  21 E ), the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  can be moved from the first deflected configuration to the second deflected configuration via the deflector  838 .  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412  (e.g., from the first deflected configuration to the second deflected configuration) but may not deflect the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . 
     As the shuttle  14  is moved into the device  188  from the shuttle first position,  FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the deflector  838  can deflect the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) toward the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . Deflecting the leading male stop  412  toward the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  via the deflector  838  can move the leading male stop  412  toward the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 . Deflecting the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) via the deflector  838  can inhibit or prevent the leading male stop  412  from catching on the tip of the jaw (e.g., the tip of the lower jaw  38  or the tip of the upper jaw  30 ) that is in the first jaw space  752   a  as the leading male stop  412  is moved into the device  188 . Deflecting the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) via the deflector  838  can inhibit or prevent the jaw (e.g., the lower jaw  38  or the upper jaw  30 ) that is in the first jaw space  752   a  from obstructing the leading male stop  412  from being moved into the device  188  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . Deflecting the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) via the deflector  838  can make the leading end of the shuttle  14  (e.g., the side of the shuttle  14  having the leading male stop  412 ) small enough to fit into the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a . For example, deflecting the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) via the deflector  838  can reduce the width leading end of the shuttle  14  (e.g., the transverse width of the shuttle  14  perpendicular to the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 ) by about 0.50 mm to about 5.00 mm, or more narrowly, by about 0.50 mm to about 3.00 mm, including every 0.01 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.50 mm, 1.00 mm, 2.00 mm, 3.00 mm, 5.00 mm). Deflecting the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) via the deflector  838  can reduce the amount of force required to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . For variations in which the leading male stop  412  and/or the leading male stop  412  have a partially deflected configuration (e.g., the first deflected configuration) when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIG.  21 H ), loading the shuttle  14  from a position in which one or both of the male stops  412  have a deflected configuration can reduce the force required to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 . 
     Once the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) is in the device  188 , the leading male stop  412  may or may not become engaged with a female stop  416  that is in the jaw in the first device space  752   a  (e.g., the female stop  416  in upper jaw  30  or the female stop  416  in the lower jaw  38 ) as the shuttle  14  is moved further into the device  188 . For example, once the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) is in the device  188 , the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) can become engaged with the female stop  416  that is in the jaw in the first device space  752   a  (e.g., the female stop  416  in upper jaw  30  or the female stop  416  in the lower jaw  38 ) as the shuttle  14  is moved further into the device  188 . When the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) becomes engaged with the female stop  416 , the leading male stop  412  can move (e.g., automatically move) from the deflected configuration to the non-deflected configuration or to a less deflected configuration. The male stops  412  can, for example, be springs that are biased to have the non-deflected configuration (e.g., the configuration shown in  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G ). 
     As another example, the loader  750  (e.g., the loader body  751 ) may not have the deflector  838 . For example, the track  756  may not have the deflector  838 . For example, the track  760  may not have the deflector  838 . The shuttle  14  can be loaded into the device  188  with or without the deflector  838 . The male stops  412  can be moved into the device  188  with or without the deflector  838 . The male stops  412  can be moved into the device  188  with or without deflecting the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412 . The male stops can be moved into the device  188  with or without deflecting the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  with a ramp (e.g., the deflector  838 ). For example, the male stops  412  can be moved into the device  188  with or without deflecting the leading male stop  412 . As another example, the deflector  838  can be attached to or integrated with the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a . As yet another example, the shape of the tip of the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188 . As still yet another example, the jaw that is in the first jaw space  752   a  can have a first ramp and the loader (e.g., the loader body  751 ) can have a second ramp (e.g., the deflector  838 ). 
       FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate that the loader  750  can have a shuttle track (e.g., the track  756  and/or the track  760 ). The shuttle track can have a first track and a second track. For example, the first track can be the track  756  and the second track can be the track  760 , or vice versa. The shuttle  14  can be simultaneously movable in the first track (e.g., the track  756 ) and the second track (e.g., the track  760 ). The gap  786  may or may not be between the first and second tracks  756 ,  760  of the shuttle track. For example,  FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate that the gap  786  can be between the first and second tracks  756 ,  760  of the shuttle track. As another example, the shuttle track can be a single track, where the track  756  can be a first lateral side of the shuttle track and the track  760  can be a second lateral side of the shuttle track, or vice versa. The shuttle  14  can be simultaneously movable in the first and second lateral sides of the shuttle track (e.g., the tracks  756  and  760 ). The gap  786  may or may not be between can be between the first and second lateral sides of the shuttle track. For example,  FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate that the gap  786  can be between the first and second lateral sides of the shuttle track. 
       FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate that the male stops  412  can be deflectable toward a longitudinal axis (e.g., center longitudinal axis) of the shuttle track (e.g., the track  756  and/or the track  760 ) by the deflector  836  and/or by the deflector  838 .  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) can be deflectable toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle track via the deflector  836 .  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) can be deflectable toward a longitudinal axis of the shuttle track via the deflector  838 . 
       FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate that when the male stops  412  can be deflectable toward an opposite lateral side the shuttle track (e.g., the track  756  and/or the track  760 ) by the deflector  836  and/or by the deflector  838 .  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) can be deflectable toward the track  756  via the deflector  836 .  FIG.  21 E  illustrates, for example, that the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) can be closer to the track  756  when the trailing male stop  412  is in a deflected configuration than when in a non-deflected configuration.  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) can be deflectable toward the track  760  via the deflector  838 .  FIG.  21 H  illustrates, for example, that the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) can be closer to the track  760  when the leading male stop  412  is in a deflected configuration than when in a non-deflected configuration. 
       FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate that when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIGS.  21 E and  21 H ), the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  can have a non-deflected configuration, a partially deflected configuration, or a fully deflected configuration. For variations in which one or both of the male stops  412  have a fully deflected configuration when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the male stops  412  may not be deflected as the male stops are loaded into (e.g., initially enter) the device  188  but can deflect outward, away from the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14 , as the male stops  412  become engaged with a female stop  416  in the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a.    
     The loader  750  can have the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 . For example, the loader  750  can have the deflector  836  but not the deflector  838  such that the track  760  can have the deflector  836  and such that the track  756  may not have a ramp (e.g., the deflector  838 ), or vice versa. As another example, the loader  750  can have the deflector  838  but not the deflector  836  such that the track  756  can have the deflector  838  and such that the track  760  may not have a ramp (e.g., the deflector  836 ), or vice versa. As yet another example, the loader  750  can have the deflector  836  and the deflector  838 . As still yet another example, the loader  750  may not have the deflector  836  and/or may not have the deflector  838 . For variations in which the loader  750  does not have the deflector  836 , the terminal edge of the track  756  and/or the jaw in the in first jaw space  752   a  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  from the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIGS.  21 E and  21 H ). For variations in which the loader  750  does not have the deflector  838 , the terminal edge of the track  760  and/or the jaw in the in first jaw space  752   a  can deflect the leading male stop  412  and/or the trailing male stop  412  as the shuttle  14  is loaded into the device  188  from the shuttle first position (e.g., the position shown in  FIGS.  21 E and  21 H ). 
       FIG.  21 H  illustrates that the deflector  838  can face the track  760 , for example, a base of the track  760 . 
       FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate the deflector  836  and the deflector  838  can be opposite each other. For example,  FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate that the deflector  836  can be in the track  760  and that the deflector  838  can be in the track  756 . As another example,  FIGS.  21 E and  21 H  illustrate that the deflector  836  can be on a first side of the shuttle track (e.g., in the track  760 ) and that the deflector  838  can be on a second side of the shuttle track (e.g., in the track  756 ). 
       FIGS.  21 I- 21 L  illustrate that the loader  750  can have the deflector  836 .  FIGS.  21 I- 21 L  illustrate that the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) can be deflected (e.g., squeezed) by the deflector  836  as the shuttle  14  is moved into the jaw that is in the first jaw stop  752   a  (e.g., the upper jaw  30 ). As another example, the lower jaw  38  can be in the first jaw stop  752   a . The shuttle position illustrated in  FIGS.  21 I- 21 K  can be, for example, a shuttle position between the shuttle first position and the shuttle second position (e.g., the shuttle second intermediate position). The shuttle position illustrated in  FIG.  21 L  can be, for example, the shuttle second position or the shuttle third position. 
       FIG.  21 I  illustrates the loader  750  without the cap  758  so that the interference between the trailing male stop  412  and the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  as the trailing male stop  412  enters the device  188  can be seen. The interference illustrated in  FIG.  21 I  can result, for example, if the trailing male stop  412  is not deflected (e.g., by the deflector  836 ) as the trailing male stop  412  is moved into the device  188 .  FIG.  21 I  illustrates that the interference can be, for example, between a tip of the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  and the trailing male stop  412 .  FIG.  21 I  illustrates that the interference can be, for example, between an outer surface of the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., an outer surface that faces the track  756  and/or the track  760 ) and the trailing male stop  412 . As another example, the interference can be, for example, between a distal edge of the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  (e.g., a distal edge adjacent the track  756  and/or the track  760 ) and the trailing male stop  412   
       FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the deflector  836  can deflect (e.g., squeeze) the trailing male stop  412  to remove the interference between the trailing male stop  412  and the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  that can otherwise form as shown in  FIG.  21 I .  FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the deflector  836  can deflect (e.g., squeeze) the trailing male stop  412  to prevent the interference shown in  FIG.  21 I  between the trailing male stop  412  and the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  from forming. For example, as the shuttle  14  transits into the device  188 , the deflector  836  can push the trailing male stop  412  closed.  FIG.  21 J  illustrates, for example, that the deflector  836  can deflect (e.g., squeeze) the trailing male stop  412  to remove the interference shown in  FIG.  21 I .  FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the cap  758  can be transparent.  FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the finger  758   F  of the cap  758  can have the deflector  836 .  FIGS.  21 I and  21 J  illustrate that the cap  758  can be removably attached to the loader  750 .  FIGS.  21 I and  21 J  illustrate that the engager  836  can be removably attached to the loader  750 , for example, by attaching the cap  758  to the loader  750 , and that the engager  836  can be detached from the loader  750 , for example, by detaching the cap  758  from the loader  750 . 
       FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the deflector  836  can have a ramp length  836   L  of about 2.0 mm to about 30.0 mm, or more narrowly, of about 2.0 mm to about 20.0 mm, or more narrowly still, of about 2.0 mm to about 10.0 mm, including every 0.1 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 2.0 mm, 5.0 mm, 8.0 mm, 10.0 mm, 20.0 mm, 30.0 mm). 
       FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the deflector  836  can have a ramp height  836   H  of about 2.0 mm to about 15.0 mm, or more narrowly, of about 2.0 mm to about 8.0 mm, or more narrowly still, of about 2.0 mm to about 5.0 mm, including every 0.1 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm, 5.0 mm, 8.0 mm, 10.0 mm, 15.0 mm). 
       FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the ramp length  836   L  (e.g., 10.0 mm) can be greater than the ramp height  836   H  (e.g., 3.5 mm). 
       FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the deflector  836  can have a ramp angle  836   A  of about 15 degrees to about 75 degrees, or more narrowly, of about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees relative to the base of the track  756  or relative to the base of the track  760 , including every 1 degree increment within these ranges (e.g., 15 degrees, 30 degrees, 45 degrees, 60 degrees, 75 degrees). 
       FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the track  760  can have a track height  760   H . The track height  760   H  can be the depth of the track  760 . The track height  760   H  can be about 2.0 mm to about 25.0 mm, or more narrowly, about 2.0 mm to about 15.0 mm, or more narrowly still, about 2.0 mm to about 8.0 mm, including every 0.1 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 2.0 mm, 5.0 mm, 8.0 mm, 10.0 mm, 15.0 mm, 25.0 mm). 
       FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the track height  760   H  (e.g., 8.0 mm) can be greater than the ramp height  836 H (e.g., 3.5 mm). 
       FIG.  21 J  illustrates that the shuttle  14  can be wider than the gap  786 . 
       FIGS.  21 K and  21 L  illustrate the loader  750  without the cap  758  so that the position and movement of the deflected trailing male stop  412  into the device  188  can be more easily seen.  FIG.  21 K  illustrates, for example, the arrangement of features shown in  FIG.  21 J  without the cap  758 .  FIG.  21 L  illustrates, for example, that the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) can be moved into the device  188  when the trailing male stop  412  is in a deflected configuration.  FIGS.  21 K and  21 L  illustrate, for example, that when the trailing male stop  412  (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) is in a deflected configuration (e.g., a fully deflected configuration), the trailing male stop  412  can be moved into the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  without interference from the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  or without interference from the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  that would substantially inhibit or outright prevent the trailing male stop  412  from being moved into the device  188 . Substantial interference can be, for example, interference that would cause the suture  70  to slip through the suture holder  795  as the loader control  762  is pushed in direction  765  while the trailing male stop  412  and the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  are interfering with each other (e.g., while the jaw in the first jaw space  752   a  is obstructing movement of the trailing male stop  412  into the device  188 ). Substantial interference can be, for example, interference that would cause the suture  70  to slip through the suture holder  795  before the shuttle  14  is in shuttle second position as the loader control  762  is pushed in direction  765 . An example of substantial interference can be the interference shown in  FIG.  21 I . 
       FIG.  21 M  illustrates that when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the male stops  412  (e.g., the first and second male stops  412   a ,  412   b ) can be in a non-deflected configuration (e.g., a non-squeezed configuration). For example,  FIG.  21 M  illustrates that when the shuttle  14  is in the first position, the first male stop  412   a  can be in a non-deflected configuration in the track  756  and the second male stop  412   b  can be in a non-deflected configuration in the track  760  or vice versa. 
       FIG.  21 M  illustrates that the cap  758  can be transparent. 
       FIG.  21 M  illustrates the loader  750  without a device (e.g., the device  188 ) in the device space  752 , for example, so that the cap  758  and the shuttle  14  can be more easily seen. 
       FIGS.  21 N- 21 P  illustrate the loader control  762  in the loader control first position when the loader control  762  is in a loader control open configuration (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  21 N ), when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  21 O ), and when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  21 P ). The loader control open configuration in  FIG.  21 N  can be, for example, a fully open configuration of the loader control  762 . The spring first and second arms  820 ,  822  in  FIG.  21 N  are both shown on the second pad  777   b , for example, so that the first pad  777   a  can be clearly seen. However, in operation, the spring first arm  820  can be biased against the first pad  777   a  and the spring second arm  822  can be biased against the second pad  777   b  such that as the loader control  762  is closed from an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  21 N ), the spring first and second arms  820 ,  822  can resist the closure by pressing against the first and second pads  777   a ,  777   b , respectively. In other words, in operation, the spring first arm  820  can be in contact with the first pad  777   a  and the spring second arm  822  can be in contact with the second pad  777   b  when the loader control  762  is in an open configuration (e.g., the open configuration shown in  FIG.  21 N ). The open configuration shown in  FIG.  21 N  can be, for example, a partially open configuration (e.g., a half open configuration). The open configuration shown in  FIG.  21 N  can be, for example, a fully open configuration. As another example, the loader control  762  may not have a spring (e.g., the spring  816 ). 
       FIGS.  21 N and  21 O  illustrate that the leading male stop  412  (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) can be in a non-deflected configuration when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position. 
       FIG.  21 Q  illustrates that the loader  750  can have a travel limiter  840 . The travel limiter  840  can limit movement of the loader control  762  and/or the suture holder  795  along the track  764  in a direction opposite to direction  765 . The travel limiter  840  can restrict movement of the loader control  762  and/or the suture holder  795  along the track  764  in a direction opposite to direction  765 . The travel limiter  840  can be positioned anywhere along the track  764 . For example,  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates that the travel limiter  840  can be positioned in the location shown to limit movement of the loader control  762  away from the loader control third position (e.g., back toward the loader control second or first position) once the loader control  762  has been moved into the loader control third position. For example,  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates that the travel limiter  840  can catch the loader control  762  in the loader control third position such that when the user lets go of the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the travel limiter  840  can inhibit or prevent the loader control  762  from migrating (e.g., passively migrating) away from the loader control third position (e.g., back toward the loader control second or first position). This can inhibit or prevent the shuttle  14  from migrating (e.g., passively migrating) away from a loaded position (e.g., from the shuttle third position). As another example, the travel limiter  840  can inhibit the user from moving the loader control  762  away from the loader control third position (e.g., back toward the loader control second or first position). Inhibiting passive migration and/or active movement of the loader control  765  in a direction opposite to direction  765  can help keep the shuttle  14  in the desired loaded position in the device  188 . 
     The travel limiter  840  can releasably lock the loader control  762  in a position beyond the travel limiter  840 . For example,  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates that the travel limiter  840  can be proximal the loader control third position or can be proximal a center of the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position. The user can move (e.g., push and/or pull) the loader control  762  in a direction opposite direction  765  if the user would like to move the loader control  762  along the track  764  toward the loader control first position. The user can thus unlock the travel limitation that the travel limiter  840  can provide by moving the loader control  762  over the travel limiter  840  along the track  764  in a direction opposition to direction  765 . 
     The travel limiter  840  can be attached to or integrated with the loader body  751 .  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates, for example, that the loader control limiter  840  can be a protrusion, an extension, an arm, a tab, an engager or any combination thereof.  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates, for example, that the travel limiter  840  can extend laterally away from the wall of the track  764  (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  21 Q ) toward a center of the loader  750 .  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates, for example, that the travel limiter can extend about 0.25 mm to about 2.00 mm, or more narrowly, about 0.25 mm to about 1.00 mm away from the track  764 , including every 0.01 mm increment within these ranges (e.g., 0.25 mm, 0.75 mm, 1.00 mm, 2.00 mm). The travel limiter  840  can be rigid or flexible. The travel limiter  840  can have a tapered surface and a non-tapered surface. The travel limiter can have an entry surface and an exit surface. The entry surface can be closer to the loader control first position along the track  764  than the travel limiter exit surface. For example,  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates that the travel limiter entry surface can be a tapered surface and that the travel limiter exit surface can be less tapered than the entry surface. For example,  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates that the exit surface can be a non-tapered surface.  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates, for example, that the travel limiter  840  can have a wedge shape.  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates, for example, that the travel limiter  840  can be a ramp.  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates that the travel limiter  840  can be shaped so that the loader control  762  and/or the suture holder  795  can be movable over the travel limiter  840  in direction  765  more easily than the loader control  762  and/or the suture holder  795  can be movable over the travel limiter  840  in a direction opposite to direction  765 .  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates that the travel limiter can have a shape (e.g., a wedge shape, a ramp shape), that can allow the loader control  762  and/or the suture holder  795  to be moved over the travel limiter  840  in direction  765  but that can inhibit or prevent the loader control  762  and/or the suture holder  795  from being moved over the travel limiter in a direction opposite to direction  765 . 
     The loader  750  can have one or multiple travel limiters  840 . For example,  FIG.  21 Q  illustrates that the loader  750  can have one travel limiter  840  and that the travel limiter  840  can be in the position shown, proximal the loader control third position (e.g., between the loader control second and third positions), to inhibit movement of the loader control  762  away from the loader control third position (e.g., back toward the loader control second or first position). This can keep the shuttle  14  in the shuttle third position or inhibit the shuttle  14  from migrating (e.g., passively migrating) away from the shuttle third position (e.g., toward the shuttle second or first position). As another example,  FIG.  21 R  illustrates that the loader the loader  750  can have the two travel limiters  840 , for example, a first travel limiter  840   a  and a second travel limiter  840   b . The loader  750  can have the first travel limiter  840   a  and/or the second travel limiter  840   b . For example,  FIG.  21 R  illustrates that the loader  750  can have the first travel limiter  840   a  and the second travel limiter  840   b.    
     The first and second travel limiters  840   a ,  840   b  can be positioned anywhere along the track  764 . For example,  FIG.  21 R  illustrates that the first and second travel limiters  840   a ,  840   b  can be positioned in the locations shown. 
     The first travel limiter  840   a  can be in the position shown. For example,  FIG.  21 R  illustrates that the first travel limiter  840   a  can be proximal the loader control second position (e.g., between the loader control first and second positions) or can be proximal a center of the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position. Such a position of the first travel limiter  840   a  can inhibit movement of the loader control  762  away from the loader second position in a direction opposite to direction  965  (e.g., back toward the loader control first position) once the loader control  762  has been moved into the loader control second position or beyond (e.g., between the loader control second and third positions). For example,  FIG.  21 R  illustrates that the first travel limiter  840   a  can catch the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is between the loader control second and third positions such that when the user lets go of the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is between the loader control second and third positions, the first travel limiter  840   a  can inhibit or prevent the loader control  762  from migrating (e.g., passively migrating) away from the loader control second position (e.g., back toward the loader control first position). This can inhibit or prevent the shuttle  14  from migrating (e.g., passively migrating) away from the shuttle second position (e.g., toward the shuttle first position). The first travel limiter  840   a  can help keep the shuttle  14  in the shuttle second position. 
     The second travel limiter  840   b  can be in the position shown. For example,  FIG.  21 R  illustrates that the second travel limiter  840   b  can be proximal the loader control third position (e.g., between the loader control second and third positions) or can be proximal a center of the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position. Such a position of the second travel limiter  840   b  can inhibit movement of the loader control  762  away from the loader third position in a direction opposite to direction  965  (e.g., back toward the loader control second or first position) once the loader control  762  has been moved into the loader control third position. For example,  FIG.  21 R  illustrates that the second travel limiter  840   b  can catch the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position such that when the user lets go of the loader control  762  when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position, the second travel limiter  840   b  can inhibit or prevent the loader control  762  from migrating (e.g., passively migrating) away from the loader control third position (e.g., back toward the loader control second or first position). This can inhibit or prevent the shuttle  14  from migrating (e.g., passively migrating) away from the shuttle third position (e.g., toward the shuttle second or first position). The second travel limiter  840   b  can help keep the shuttle  14  in the shuttle third position. 
     The first and second travel limiters  840   a ,  840   b  in  FIG.  21 R  can have any of the features of the travel limiter  840 , for example, described in relation to  FIG.  21 Q . As another example, the first and second travel limiters  840   a ,  840   b  in  FIG.  21 R  can have the features shown in  FIG.  21 R . 
     As another example, the engagement of the leading male stop  412  with a female stop  416  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position can inhibit or prevent migration (e.g., passive migration) of the shuttle  14  away from a loaded position (e.g., away from the shuttle second position) when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position. 
     As another example, the engagement of the leading male stop  412  with a female stop  416  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position can inhibit or prevent migration (e.g., passive migration) of the shuttle  14  away from a loaded position (e.g., away from the shuttle third position) when the loader control  762  is in the loader control third position. 
     As another example, the engagement of the leading male stop  412  with a female stop  416  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position can allow migration (e.g., passive migration) of the shuttle  14  from the shuttle third position to the shuttle second position but can inhibit or prevent migration (e.g., passive migration) of the shuttle  14  from the shuttle second position toward the shuttle first position. 
     As another example, the loader  750  may not have a travel limiter (e.g., the travel limiter  840 . In such variations, the engagement of the leading male stop  412  with a female stop  416  can inhibit or prevent migration (e.g., passive migration) of the shuttle  14  away from a loaded position (e.g., away from the shuttle second or third position). 
       FIG.  21 S  illustrates that the opener  834  can be thinner than the depth of the track  764 .  FIG.  21 S  illustrates, for example, that the opener  834  can be positioned at the terminal end of the track  764  so that the male portion  802  (e.g., the arm  806 , the first protrusion  808   a , and/or the second protrusion  808   b ) can be moved (e.g., pushed and/or pulled) into the opener  834 .  FIGS.  21 A and  21 S  illustrate that the leading edge of the opener  834  can be curved.  FIGS.  21 A and  21 S  illustrate that the leading edge of the opener  834  can have a crescent shape. 
     The loader  750  can have any combination of features shown in  FIGS.  14 A- 21 S . The loader control  762  can have any combination of features shown in  FIGS.  14 A- 21 S .  FIGS.  14 A- 18    illustrate, for example, that the loader  750  can have the loader control  762  having the features shown in  FIGS.  19 A and  19 B .  FIGS.  21 A- 21 S  illustrate, for example, that the loader  750  can have the loader control  762  having the features shown in  FIGS.  20 A- 20 O . As another example, the loader  750  in  FIGS.  14 A- 18    can have the loader control  762  shown in  FIGS.  20 A- 20 O , and the loader  750  in  FIGS.  21 A- 21 S  can have the loader control  762  shown in  FIGS.  19 A- 19 B .  FIGS.  14 A- 18    illustrate, for example, that the device  188  can have radial female stops  416  that the male stops  412  can be engageable with.  FIGS.  21 A- 21 S  illustrate, for example, that the device  188  can have lateral female stops  416  that the male stops  412  can be engageable with. The loader  750  in  FIGS.  21 A- 21 S  can have, for example, any of the features shown in  FIG.  18    and any of the other features in  FIGS.  14 A- 19 B . For example, the loader  750  in  FIGS.  21 A- 21 S  can have the suture holder  766 , the holders  788 , the suture grabber  790 , the track  791 , the ribs  792 , and the rib engagers  794  as shown in  FIG.  18   , or any combination thereof. 
     The device  188  can be attached to the loader  750  when the jaws (e.g., the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38 ) are in an open configuration. The open configuration can be a partially open configuration or a fully open configuration. The device  188  can be detached from the loader  750  when the shuttle  14  is in one of the jaws (e.g., the upper jaw  30  or the lower jaw  38 ). The device  188  can be detached from the loader  750  when the jaws (e.g., the upper and lower jaws  30 ,  38 ) are in an open configuration. During loading (e.g., as the shuttle  14  is being moved into the device  188 ), one or both of the jaws (e.g., the upper jaw  30  and/or the lower jaw  38 ) can be stationary or can be non-movable, for example, such that the shuttle  14  can be movable relative to the device  188  (e.g., relative to the upper jaw  30  and/or relative to the lower jaw  38 ). 
     The loader  750  can be used to load the shuttle  14  into jaws having more than one female stop  416 , for example, two female stops  416 . 
     Any of the devices (e.g., devices  188 ) disclosed, illustrated, contemplated, and/or incorporated herein can be removably attachable to the loader  750 , for example, to load the shuttle  14  into the device  188 , to unload the shuttle  14  from the device  188 , or to both load the shuttle  14  into the device  188  and to unload the shuttle  14  from the device  188 . 
     The loader  750  can have any combination of features shown in  FIGS.  14 A- 21 S . For example, the loader  750  can have a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 ) and a shuttle track (e.g., the track  756  and/or the track  760 ). The shuttle  14  can be releasably attachable to the loader  750 . The shuttle  14  can be releasably attached to the loader  750 , for example, in the shuttle track. The shuttle  14  can be releasably attached to the loader  750 , for example, to the cap  758 . The shuttle  14  can be loaded onto the loader  750 . The shuttle  14  can be loaded onto the loader  750 , for example, into the cap  758 . The shuttle  14  can be loaded onto the loader  750 , for example, between the cap  758  and the loader body  751 . The shuttle  14  can be loaded onto the loader  750 , for example, in the shuttle track (e.g., in the track  756  and/or the track  760 ). The shuttle  14  can be loaded onto the loader  750  before or after a device (e.g., the device  188 ) is releasably attached to the loader  750 . The shuttle  14  can be releasably attached to the loader  750 , for example, before or after a device (e.g., the device  188 ) is releasably attached to the loader  750 . The cap  758  can hold the shuttle  14  in position, for example, in the shuttle first position on the loader  750  until the user loads the shuttle  14  into the device  188 , for example, using the loader control  762 . A device (e.g., the device  188 ) can be removably attachable to the loader  750 . The device  188  can be, for example, a suture device, a tissue piercer, or a suture device and a tissue piercer. 
     When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the shuttle  14  can be movable from outside the device  188  to inside the device  188 . When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the shuttle  14  can be movable relative to the shuttle track (e.g., the track  756  and/or the track  760 ) from outside the device  188  to inside the device  188 . When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the shuttle  14  can be movable from inside the shuttle track to outside the shuttle track. 
     The loader  750  can have a loader control (e.g., the loader control  762 ). The loader control  762  can have a loader control open configuration and a loader control closed configuration. The loader control  762  can be releasably lockable in the loader control closed configuration. When a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be movable into the device  188 . When a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control closed configuration, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . The loader control  762  can have a loader control open configuration, a loader control first closed configuration, and a loader control second closed configuration. The loader control  762  can be releasably lockable in the loader control first closed configuration, for example, via a connector (e.g., the connector  800 ). The loader control  762  can be releasably lockable in the loader control second closed configuration, for example, via a connector (e.g., the connector  800 ). When a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be movable into the device  188 . When a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . 
     The loader control  762  can have an unlockable closed configuration. The loader control  762  can have a releasably lockable closed configuration. 
     The loader control closed configuration can be a releasably lockable closed configuration. The loader control closed configuration can be a lockable and unlockable configuration. The loader control  762  can be releasably locked in the loader control closed configuration, for example, by engaging the male portion  802  of the connector  800  with the female portion  804  of the connector  800 , and the loader control  762  can be released or unlocked from the loader control closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the male portion  802  of the connector  800  from the female portion  804  of the connector  800 . 
     The loader control first closed configuration can be a releasably lockable closed configuration. The loader control first closed configuration can be a lockable and unlockable configuration. The loader control  762  can be releasably locked in the loader control first closed configuration, for example, by engaging the male portion  802  (e.g., the first protrusion  808   a ) of the connector  800  with the female portion  804  of the connector  800 , and the loader control  762  can be released or unlocked from the loader control first closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the male portion  802  (e.g., the first protrusion  808   a ) of the connector  800  from the female portion  804  of the connector  800 . 
     The loader control second closed configuration can be a releasably lockable closed configuration. The loader control second closed configuration can be a lockable and unlockable configuration. The loader control  762  can be releasably locked in the loader control second closed configuration, for example, by engaging the male portion  802  (e.g., the second protrusion  808   b ) of the connector  800  with the female portion  804  of the connector  800 , and the loader control  762  can be released or unlocked from the loader control second closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the male portion  802  (e.g., the second protrusion  808   b ) of the connector  800  from the female portion  804  of the connector  800 . 
     The loader control  762  can be openable and closable. The loader control closed configuration can be openable. The loader control first closed configuration can be openable. The loader control second closed configuration can be openable. 
     The loader  750  can have a suture holder (e.g., the suture holder  795 ). The suture holder  795  can be releasably lockable, for example, in a closed configuration. The suture holder  795  can be a releasably lockable suture holder. The loader  750  can have a releasably lockable suture holder (e.g., the suture holder  795 ). The loader control  762  can have the suture holder  795 . The loader control  762  can be the suture holder  795 . The suture holder  795  can be the loader control  762 . 
     The shuttle  14  can be movable via the loader control  762 . The shuttle  14  can be movable via the suture holder  795 . 
     The suture  70  can be movable via the loader control  762 . The suture  70  can be movable via the suture holder  795 . 
     The shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable via the loader control  762 . The shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable via the suture holder  795 . 
     The suture holder  795  can have a suture holder open configuration and a suture holder closed configuration. The suture holder open configuration can, for example, correspond to the loader control open configuration, and the suture holder closed configuration can, for example, correspond to the loader control closed configuration. The suture holder  795  can be releasably lockable in the suture holder closed configuration, for example, via the connector  800 . The suture holder  795  can have a releasably lockable closed configuration. The suture holder closed configuration can be a releasably lockable closed configuration. When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder closed configuration, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . 
     The suture holder  795  can have suture holder open configuration, a suture holder first closed configuration, and a suture holder second closed configuration. The suture holder open configuration can, for example, correspond to the loader control open configuration, the suture holder first closed configuration can, for example, correspond to the loader control first closed configuration, and the suture holder second closed configuration can, for example, correspond to the loader control second closed configuration. The suture holder  795  can be releasably lockable in the suture holder first closed configuration, for example, via a connector (e.g., the connector  800 ). The suture holder  795  can be releasably lockable in the suture holder second closed configuration, for example, via a connector (e.g., the connector  800 ). When a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be movable into the device  188 . When a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder second closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . 
     The loader control  762  can have a clamp. The clamp can be openable and closable. The loader control  762  can be an openable and closable clamp. The suture holder  795  can have a clamp. The clamp can be openable and closable. The suture holder  795  can be an openable and closable clamp. 
     The loader  750  can have a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ). 
     A suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) can be clampable by the loader control  762 . The suture  70  can be releasably clampable by the loader control  762 . A suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) can be clampable by the suture holder  795 . The suture  70  can be releasably clampable by the suture holder  795 . 
     When the suture  70  is releasably clamped by the loader control  762 , the shuttle  14  can be attached to the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is releasably clamped by the loader control  762 , the shuttle  14  can be considered releasably attached to the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is releasably clamped by the loader control  762 , the shuttle  14  can be releasably attached to the loader control  762  via the suture  70 . When the suture  70  is releasably clamped by the loader control  762 , the shuttle  14  can be attached to the loader control  762 , for example, via the releasable connection between the suture  70  and the loader control  762 . 
     When the suture  70  is releasably clamped by the suture holder  795 , the shuttle  14  can be attached to the suture holder  795 . When the suture  70  is releasably clamped by the suture holder  795 , the shuttle  14  can be considered releasably attached to the suture holder  795 . When the suture  70  is releasably clamped by the suture holder  795 , the shuttle  14  can be releasably attached to the suture holder  795  via the suture  70 . When the suture  70  is releasably clamped by the suture holder  795 , the shuttle  14  can be attached to the suture holder  795 , for example, via the releasable connection between the suture  70  and the suture holder  795 . 
     The suture  70  can be more clamped when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration than when in the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration. 
     The suture  70  can be more clamped when the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder second closed configuration than when in the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder first closed configuration. 
     When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable through the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration, the suture  70  can move (e.g., roll, translate, slip) through the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the loader control  762  can inhibit the suture  70  from moving (e.g., rolling, translating, slipping) through the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be detached from the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control first closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be considered detached from the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be attached to the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is in the loader control second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be considered attached to the loader control  762 . 
     When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder first closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable through the suture holder  795 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder first closed configuration, the suture  70  can move (e.g., roll, translate, slip) through the suture holder  795 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder second closed configuration, the suture holder  795  can inhibit the suture  70  from moving (e.g., rolling, translating, slipping) through the suture holder  795 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder first closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be detached from the suture holder  795 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder first closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be considered detached from the suture holder  795 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be attached to the suture holder  795 . When the suture is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be considered attached to the suture holder  795 . 
     The loader control  762  can be movable relative to the shuttle track (e.g., the track  756  and/or the track  760 ). 
     The suture holder  795  can be movable relative to the shuttle track (e.g., the track  756  and/or the track  760 ). 
     When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the loader control  762  can be movable relative to the device  188 . 
     When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the suture holder  795  can be movable relative to the device  188 . 
     The shuttle  14  can follow the loader control  762 . 
     The shuttle  14  can be configured to follow the loader control  762 . 
     The shuttle  14  can follow the suture holder  795 . 
     The shuttle  14  can be configured to follow the suture holder  795 . 
     The loader control  762  can have a connector (e.g., the connector  800 ). The connector can have a male portion (e.g., the male portion  802 ) and a female portion (e.g., the female portion  804 ). The connector  800  can be a clip. 
     The suture holder  795  can have a connector (e.g., the connector  800 ). The connector  800  can have a male portion (e.g., the male portion  802 ) and a female portion (e.g., the female portion  804 ). The connector  800  can be a clip. 
     Movement of the loader control  762  can be restrictable by the a travel limiter (e.g., the travel limiter  840 ). For example, movement of the loader control  762  can be preventable and/or inhibitable by the travel limiter  840 . The loader control  762  can be movable relative to the travel limiter  840 . The loader control  762  can be movable into the travel limiter  840 . The travel limiter  840  can limit movement of the loader control  762 . The travel limiter  840  can inhibit or prevent the loader control  762  from moving. The travel limiter  840  can be configured to limit travel of the loader control  762 . 
     Movement of the suture holder  795  can be restrictable by the a travel limiter (e.g., the travel limiter  840 ). For example, movement of the suture holder  795  can be preventable and/or inhibitable by the travel limiter  840 . The suture holder  795  can be movable relative to the travel limiter  840 . The suture holder  795  can be movable into the travel limiter  840 . The travel limiter  840  can limit movement of the suture holder  795 . The travel limiter  840  can inhibit or prevent the suture holder  795  from moving. The travel limiter  840  can be configured to limit travel of the suture holder  795 . 
     The travel limiter  840  can be a protrusion on the loader  750 . The travel limiter  840  can have a wedge shape. 
     The loader control  762  can be movable from a loader control first position to a loader control second position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the loader control  762  can be unrestricted by the travel limiter  840 . When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the loader control  762  can be restricted by the travel limiter  840 . 
     The suture holder  795  can be movable from a suture holder first position to a suture holder second position. When the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder first position, the suture holder  795  can be unrestricted by the travel limiter  840 . When the suture holder  795  is in the suture holder second position, the suture holder  795  can be restricted by the travel limiter  840 . 
     The loader  750  can have an opener (e.g., the opener  834 ). The opener  834  can be a protrusion on the loader  750 . The loader control  762  can be unlockable via the opener  834 . The suture holder  795  can be unlockable via the opener  834 . 
     The loader control  762  can be movable relative to the opener  834 . The loader control  762  can be movable into the opener  834 . The loader control  762  can be movable toward and/or away from the opener  834 . 
     The suture holder  795  can be movable relative to the opener  834 . The suture holder  795  can be movable into the opener  834 . The suture holder  795  can be movable toward and/or away from the opener  834 . 
     The shuttle  14  can be moveable from a shuttle first position to a shuttle second position. When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750  and the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the device  188  can have an open configuration. When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750  and the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the device  188  can have the open configuration. The shuttle  14  can be contractible via the loader  750 . 
     The loader  750  can have a deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The loader  750  can have the deflector  836 . The loader can have the deflector  838 . The loader  750  can have the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 . The shuttle  14  can be contractible via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) can have a ramp. 
     A width of the shuttle  14  can be decreasable via the loader  750 . A width of the shuttle can be decreasable via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). 
     The shuttle can have a shuttle first end and a shuttle second end. The shuttle first end and/or the shuttle second end can be contractible via the loader  750 . The shuttle first end and/or the shuttle second end can be contractible via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). A width of the shuttle first end and/or a width of the shuttle second end can be decreasable via the loader  750 . A width of the shuttle first end and/or a width of the shuttle second end can be decreasable via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). 
     The shuttle  14  can have a shuttle first longitudinal end and a shuttle second longitudinal end. The shuttle first longitudinal end can have the shuttle first tip  164   a  and the shuttle second longitudinal end can have the shuttle second tip  164   b  or vice versa. The shuttle first longitudinal end can have the first male stop  412   a  and/or the shuttle second longitudinal end can have the second male stop  412   b  or vice versa. The shuttle first longitudinal end and/or the shuttle second longitudinal end can be contractible via the loader  750 . The shuttle first longitudinal end and/or the shuttle second longitudinal end can be contractible via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). A width of the shuttle first longitudinal end and/or a width of the shuttle second longitudinal end can be decreasable via the loader  750 . A width the shuttle first longitudinal end and/or a width of the shuttle second longitudinal end can be decreasable via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). 
     The shuttle  14  can be movable against the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The shuttle first end and/or the shuttle second end can be movable against the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). 
     The shuttle  14  can be moveable from a shuttle first position to a shuttle second position. The shuttle  14  can have a shuttle first end and a shuttle second end. The shuttle first end can have the shuttle first tip  164   a  and the shuttle second end can have the shuttle second tip  164   b  or vice versa. The shuttle first end can have the first male stop  412   a  and/or the shuttle second end can have the second male stop  412   b  or vice versa. The shuttle first end can be contractible. The shuttle second end can be contractible. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle first end and the shuttle second end can be outside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle first end can be inside the device  188 , the shuttle second end can be outside the device  188 , and the shuttle second end can be in a contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle first end can be in a non-contracted configuration and the shuttle second end can be in a non-contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle first end can be in a contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle second end can be in contact with the ramp. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the ramp can be between the device  188  and the shuttle second end. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the ramp can be between the shuttle first end and the shuttle second end. 
     The shuttle  14  can be moveable from the shuttle second position to a shuttle third position. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle first end and the shuttle second end can be inside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle second end can be in the contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle first end can be in a contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle first end can be less contracted than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position. When the shuttle is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle second end can be in the contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle first end can be in a contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle first end can be in a non-contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle second end can be in the contracted configuration. 
     The shuttle  14  can have a male stop (e.g., the male stop  412 ). The male stop  412  can be deflectable via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The male stop  412  can be deflectable toward a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The male stop  412  can be movable against the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The male stop  412  can be movable against the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) via the loader control  762 . The male stop  412  can be pushable or pullable into the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The male stop  412  can be pushable or pullable into the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) via the loader control  762 . 
     The loader control  762  can be movable from a loader control first position to a loader control second position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the male stop  412  can have a non-deflected configuration. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the male stop  412  can have a deflected configuration. The male stop  412  can be more deflected when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position than when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) can be between the device  188  and the male stop  412 . When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the male stop  412  can be in contact with the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). 
     When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) can be outside of the device  188 . 
     When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) can be between a device first jaw and a device second jaw. When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) can be closer to a device first jaw than to a device second jaw. 
     The shuttle  14  can have a first male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) and a second male stop (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ). The first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can be deflectable via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can be deflectable toward a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can be movable against the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can be movable against the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) via the loader control  762 . The first male stop  412  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can be pushable or pullable into the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can be pushable or pullable into the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) via the loader control  762 . When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a non-deflected configuration and the second male stop can have a non-deflected configuration. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the second male stop  412   b  can have a deflected configuration. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a deflected configuration. The first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can be more deflected when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position than when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position. When the loader control is in the loader control first position, the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) can be between the device  188  and the first male stop  412   a . When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) can be between the device  188  and the second male stop  412   b . When the loader control is in the loader control second position, the first male stop  412   a  or the second male stop  412   b  can be in contact with the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). 
     The shuttle  14  can have a shuttle first position and a shuttle second position. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can be outside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be inside the device  188 , the second male stop  412   b  can be outside the device  188 , and the second male stop can be in a deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first male stop  412   a  can be in a non-defected configuration and the second male stop  412   b  can be in a non-deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be in a deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the second male stop  412   b  can be in contact with the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) can be between the device  188  and the second male stop  412   b . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ) can be between the first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first male stop  412   a  can be on a first side of the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be on a second side of the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The shuttle  14  can be moveable from the shuttle second position to a shuttle third position. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can be inside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the second male stop  412   b  can be in the deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be in a deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the first male stop  412   a  can be less deflected than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the second male stop can be in the deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be in a deflected configuration. When the shuttle is in the shuttle third position, the first male stop  412   a  can be in a non-deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the second male stop  412   b  can be in the deflected configuration. 
     The first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can be movable in the shuttle track (e.g., the track  756  and/or the track  760 ). The first male stop  412   a  can be movable in a first lateral side of the shuttle track. The second male stop  412   b  can be movable in a second lateral side of the shuttle track. The first male stop  412   a  can be movable in the track  756  and the second male stop  412   b  can be movable in the track  760  or vice versa. The first lateral side of the shuttle track can be, for example, the track  756 , and the second lateral side of the shuttle track can be, for example, the track  760 . The first lateral side of the shuttle track can be, for example, the track  760 , and the second lateral side of the shuttle track can be, for example, the track  756 . The first lateral side of the shuttle track and the second lateral side of the shuttle track can be separated by a gap (e.g., the gap  786 ). The suture  70  can be movable in the gap  786 . 
     When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can be outside the device  188 , the first male stop  412   a  can be in the first lateral side of the shuttle track, and the second male stop  412   b  can be in the second lateral side of the shuttle track. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be inside the device  188 , the second male stop  412   b  can be outside the device  188 , and the second male stop  412   b  can be in a deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be outside the first lateral side of the shuttle track and the second male stop  412   b  can be in the second lateral side of the shuttle track. 
     When the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  are in the shuttle track (e.g., the track  756  and/or the track  760 ), the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b  can be deflectable via the deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). 
     The shuttle track can have a first track and a second track. The first track can be, for example, the track  756 , and the second track can be, for example, the track  760 . The first track can be, for example, the track  760 , and the second track can be, for example, the track  756 . The first male stop  412   a  can be movable in the first track. The second male stop  412   b  can be movable in the second track. The first track and the second track can be separated by a gap (e.g., the gap  786 ). The suture  70  can be movable in the gap  786 . 
     When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can be outside the device  188 , the first male stop  412   a  can be in the first track, and the second male stop  412   b  can be in the second track. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be inside the device  188 , the second male stop  412   b  can be outside the device  188 , and the second male stop  412   b  can be in a deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a non-deflected configuration in the first track and the second male stop  412   b  can have a non-deflected configuration in the second track. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be outside the first track and the second male stop  412   b  can be in the second track. When the first male stop  412   a  is in the first track, the first male stop  412   a  can be deflectable via the deflector and/or when the second male stop  412   b  is in the second track, the second male stop  412   b  can be deflectable via the deflector. 
     The shuttle  14  can have a shuttle first longitudinal end and a shuttle second longitudinal end. The shuttle first longitudinal end can have the first male stop  412   a  and the shuttle second longitudinal end can have the second male stop  412   b  or vice versa. 
     The first male stop  412   a  can have a first male stop non-deflected configuration and a first male stop deflected configuration. When the first male stop  412   a  has the first male stop non-deflected configuration, the shuttle first longitudinal end can have a shuttle first longitudinal end first width. When the first male stop  412   a  has the first male stop deflected configuration, the shuttle first longitudinal end can have a shuttle first longitudinal end second width. The shuttle first longitudinal end second width can be less than the shuttle first longitudinal end first width. 
     The second male stop  412   b  can have a second male stop non-deflected configuration and a second male stop deflected configuration. When the second male stop  412   b  has the second male stop non-deflected configuration, the shuttle second longitudinal end can have a shuttle second longitudinal end first width. When the second male stop  412   b  has the second male stop deflected configuration, the shuttle second longitudinal end can have a shuttle second longitudinal end second width. The shuttle second longitudinal end second width can be less than the shuttle second longitudinal end first width. 
     The shuttle  14  can be connected to the loader control  762  via the suture  70 . The shuttle  14  can be releasably connected to the loader control  762  via the suture  70 . The shuttle  14  can be releasably connectable to the loader control  762  via the suture  70 . 
     The loader control  762  can be movable from a loader control first position to a loader control second position. The shuttle  14  can be movable from a shuttle first position to a shuttle second position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle first position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle second position. The suture  70  can be under less tension when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position than when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position. The suture  70  can be under more tension when the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position than when the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position. 
     The suture  70  can be moveable from a suture first position to a suture second position. When the suture  70  is in the suture first position, the device  188  can be releasably attachable to the loader  750 . When the device  188  is releasably attached to the loader  750 , the suture  70  can be moveable from the suture first position to the suture second position. More of the suture  70  can be in the device  188  when the suture  70  is in the suture second position than when the suture  70  is in the suture first position. None of the suture  70  may be in the device  188  when the suture  70  is in the suture first position. Some of the suture  70  may be in the device  188  when the suture  70  is in the suture first position. 
     The suture  70  can be moveable from the suture first position to the suture second position via the loader control  762 . When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the suture  70  can be in the suture first position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the suture  70  can be in the suture second position. 
     The shuttle  14  can be pullable or pushable into the device  188  via the loader control  762 . 
     The suture  70  can be pullable or pushable into the device  188  via the loader control  762 . 
     The shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be pullable or pushable into the device  188  via the loader control  762 . 
     The suture  70  can be under less tension when the suture  70  is in the suture first position than when the suture  70  is in the suture second position. The suture  70  can be under more tension when the suture  70  is in the suture second position than when the suture is in the suture first position. 
     Less of the shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle track when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position than when in the shuttle first position. 
     When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the device  188  can be releasably attached to the loader  750 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the device  188  can be detached from the loader  750 . Less of the shuttle  14  can be in the shuttle track when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position. More of the shuttle  14  can be in the device  188  when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position. 
     When the device  188  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the shuttle  14  can be movable relative to the shuttle track toward the device  188 . 
     The loader  750  can have any combination of features disclosed herein. 
     The shuttle  14  can have any combination of features disclosed herein. For example, the shuttle  14  can have 0, 1, 2, or more male stops  412 . For example, the shuttle  14  can have a first male stop  412   a  and/or a second male stop  412   b . For variations in which the shuttle  14  has one male stop  412 , the male stop  412  can be releasably engageable (e.g., releasably loadable) into a first female stop (e.g., the first female  416   a ) in the first jaw and the male stop  412  can be releasably engageable (e.g., releasably loadable) into a second female stop (e.g., the second female stop  416   b ) in the second jaw. 
     The shuttle  14  can contract as the shuttle  14  is moved into the device  188 . The shuttle  14  can contract, for example, by a male stop  412  being moved from a non-deflected configuration to a deflected configuration. The shuttle  14  can contract, for example, as the shuttle  14  is moved (e.g., pulled and/or pushed) against a deflector. The shuttle  14  can expand as the shuttle  14  releasably engages with the device  188 . The shuttle  14  can releasably engage with the device  188 , for example, via the male stop  412  releasably engaging with a female stop  416 . The shuttle  14  can expand, for example, by the male stop  412  moving (e.g., automatically moving) from a deflected configuration (e.g., from the contracted configuration) to a less deflected configuration (e.g., to a less contracted configuration) or to a non-deflected configuration. The shuttle  14  can expand, for example, as the male stop  412  moves into (e.g., becomes releasably engaged with) a female stop  416 . 
     The loader  750  can have a loader control (e.g., the loader control  762 ). The loader control  762  can be openable and closable. The loader control  762  can have an open configuration. The loader control  762  can have a closed configuration. The loader control  762  can be releasably lockable in the closed configuration. The loader  750  can have a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ). When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the closed configuration, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . The loader control  762  can be releasably locked in the closed configuration, for example, by engaging the connector  800  (e.g., by engaging the male portion  802  with the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The loader control  762  can be released from the closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The loader control  762  can be unlocked from the closed configuration, for example, by unlocking the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The open configuration of the loader control  762  can also be referred to as the loader control open configuration. The closed configuration of the loader control  762  can also be referred to as the loader control closed configuration. 
     The loader  750  can have a loader control (e.g., the loader control  762 ). The loader control  762  can be openable and closable. The loader control  762  can have an open configuration. The loader control  762  can have a first closed configuration. The loader control  762  can be releasably lockable in the first closed configuration. The loader control  762  can have a second closed configuration. The loader control  762  can be releasably lockable in the second closed configuration. The loader  750  can have a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ). The suture  70  can be more clamped when the loader control  762  is in the second closed configuration than when the loader control  762  is in the first closed configuration. When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the first closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable (e.g., slidable, rollable, and/or translatable) through the loader control  70 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the loader control  762  can inhibit the suture  70  from moving (e.g., sliding, rolling, and/or translating) through the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the first closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be detached from the loader control  762 . When the suture  70  is in the loader control  762  and the loader control  762  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be attached to the loader control  762 . The loader control  762  can be releasably locked in the first closed configuration, for example, by engaging the connector  800  (e.g., by engaging the first protrusion  808   a  with the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The loader control  762  can be released from the first closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the first protrusion  808   a  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The loader control  762  can be unlocked from the first closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the first protrusion  808   a  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The loader control  762  can be releasably locked in the second closed configuration, for example, by engaging the connector  800  (e.g., by engaging the second protrusion  808   b  with the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The loader control  762  can be released from the second closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the second protrusion  808   b  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The loader control  762  can be unlocked from the second closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the second protrusion  808   b  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The open configuration of the loader control  762  can also be referred to as the loader control open configuration. The first closed configuration of the loader control  762  can also be referred to as the loader control first closed configuration. The second closed configuration of the loader control  762  can also be referred to as the loader control second closed configuration. 
     The loader  750  can have a suture holder (e.g., the suture holder  795 ). The suture holder  795  can be openable and closable. The suture holder  795  can have an open configuration. The suture holder  795  can have a closed configuration. The suture holder  795  can be releasably lockable in the closed configuration. The loader  750  can have a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ). When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the closed configuration, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . The suture holder  795  can be releasably locked in the closed configuration, for example, by engaging the connector  800  (e.g., by engaging the male portion  802  with the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The suture holder  795  can be released from the closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The suture holder  795  can be unlocked from the closed configuration, for example, by unlocking the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the male portion  802  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The open configuration of the suture holder  795  can also be referred to as the suture holder open configuration. The closed configuration of the suture holder  795  can also be referred to as the suture holder closed configuration. The loader  750  can have a loader control (e.g., the loader control  762 ). The loader control  762  can have the suture holder  795 . 
     The loader  750  can have a suture holder (e.g., the suture holder  795 ). The suture holder  795  can be openable and closable. The suture holder  795  can have an open configuration. The suture holder  795  can have a first closed configuration. The suture holder can be releasably lockable in the first closed configuration. The suture holder  795  can have a second closed configuration. The suture holder  795  can be releasably lockable in the second closed configuration. The loader  750  can have a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ). The suture  70  can be more clamped when the suture holder  795  is in the second closed configuration than when the suture holder  795  is in the first closed configuration. When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be movable into the device  188 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the first closed configuration, the suture  70  can be movable (e.g., slidable, rollable, and/or translatable) through the suture holder  70 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the suture holder  795  can inhibit the suture  70  from moving (e.g., sliding, rolling, and/or translating) through the suture holder  795 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the first closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be detached from the suture holder  795 . When the suture  70  is in the suture holder  795  and the suture holder  795  is releasably locked in the second closed configuration, the shuttle  14  can be attached to the suture holder  795 . The suture holder  795  can be releasably locked in the first closed configuration, for example, by engaging the connector  800  (e.g., by engaging the first protrusion  808   a  with the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The suture holder  795  can be released from the first closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the first protrusion  808   a  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The suture holder  795  can be unlocked from the first closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the first protrusion  808   a  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The suture holder  795  can be releasably locked in the second closed configuration, for example, by engaging the connector  800  (e.g., by engaging the second protrusion  808   b  with the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The suture holder  795  can be released from the second closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the second protrusion  808   b  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The suture holder  795  can be unlocked from the second closed configuration, for example, by disengaging the connector  800  (e.g., by disengaging the second protrusion  808   b  from the female portion  804  and/or vice versa). The open configuration of the suture holder  795  can also be referred to as the suture holder open configuration. The first closed configuration of the suture holder  795  can also be referred to as the suture holder first closed configuration. The second closed configuration of the suture holder  795  can also be referred to as the suture holder second closed configuration. The loader  750  can have a loader control (e.g., the loader control  762 ). The loader control  762  can have the suture holder  795 . 
     The shuttle  14  can be moveable from a shuttle first position to a shuttle second position. The shuttle  14  can have a shuttle first end and a shuttle second end. The shuttle first end can be contractible and/or the shuttle second end can be contractible. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle first end and the shuttle second end can be outside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle first end can be inside the device  188 , the shuttle second end can be outside the device  188 , and the shuttle second end can have a first contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle first end can have a non-contracted configuration and the shuttle second end can have a non-contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle first end can have a contracted configuration. The shuttle  14  can be moveable from the shuttle second position to a shuttle third position. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle first end and the shuttle second end can be inside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle second end can have a second contracted configuration. The second contracted configuration can be more contracted than the first contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle first end can have a contracted configuration, and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle first end can be less contracted than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the shuttle second end can have second contracted configuration. The second contracted configuration can be more contracted than the first contracted configuration. 
     The shuttle first end can be contractible and expandable. The shuttle first end can have a contracted configuration and an expanded configuration (also referred to as a non-contracted configuration). The shuttle first end can be biased to have the expanded configuration. When the shuttle first end is moved against a defector and/or a jaw of the device  188 , the shuttle first end can change from the expanded configuration to the contracted configuration. The shuttle first end can change from the expanded configuration to the contracted configuration, for example, by a male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) being deflected by the deflector and/or by a jaw of the device  188 . When the shuttle first end is moved into a female stop (e.g., the first female stop  416   a ), the shuttle first end can change from a contracted configuration (e.g., the contracted configuration) to a less contracted configuration or to the expanded configuration. The shuttle first end can expand, for example, by a male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) becoming less deflected or by returning to a non-deflected configuration. The deflector can be the deflector  836 . The deflector can be the deflector  838 . The first male stop  412   a  can be the leading male stop or the trailing male stop. 
     The shuttle second end can be contractible and expandable. The shuttle second end can have a contracted configuration and an expanded configuration (also referred to as a non-contracted configuration). The shuttle second end can be biased to have the expanded configuration. When the shuttle second end is moved against a defector and/or a jaw of the device  188 , the shuttle second end can change from the expanded configuration to the contracted configuration. The shuttle second end can change from the expanded configuration to the contracted configuration, for example, by a male stop (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) being deflected by the deflector and/or by a jaw of the device  188 . When the shuttle second end is moved into a female stop (e.g., the second female stop  416   b ), the shuttle second end can change from a contracted configuration (e.g., the contracted configuration) to a less contracted configuration or to the expanded configuration. The shuttle second end can expand, for example, by a male stop (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) becoming less deflected or by returning to a non-deflected configuration. The deflector can be the deflector  836 . The deflector can be the deflector  838 . The second male stop  412   b  can be the leading male stop or the trailing male stop. For example, the first male stop  412   a  can be the leading male stop and the second male stop  412   b  can be the trailing male stop or vice versa. 
     The loader  750  can have a deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The shuttle  14  can have a first male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) and a second male stop (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ). The first male stop and/or the second male stop can be deflectable via the deflector. The loader  750  can have a loader control (e.g., the loader control  762 ). The loader control  762  can be movable from a loader control first position to a loader control second position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a non-deflected configuration and the second male stop  412   b  can have a non-deflected configuration. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the second male stop can have a deflected configuration. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a deflected configuration. The shuttle  14  can be moveable from a shuttle first position to a shuttle second position. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can be outside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can be inside the device  188 , the second male stop  412   b  can be outside the device  188 , and the second male stop  412   b  can have a first deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a non-defected configuration and the second male stop  412   b  can have a non-deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a deflected configuration. The shuttle can be moveable from the shuttle second position to a shuttle third position. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the first male stop  412   a  and the second male stop  412   b  can be inside the suture device. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the second male stop  412   b  can have a second deflected configuration. The second deflected configuration can be more deflected than the first deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a deflected configuration, and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the first male stop  412   a  can be less deflected than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the second male stop  412   b  can have a second deflected configuration. The second deflected configuration can be more deflected than the first deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a deflected configuration, and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the first male stop  412   a  can have a non-deflected configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle third position, the second male stop  412   b  can have a second deflected configuration. The second deflected configuration can be more deflected than the first deflected configuration. 
     When the first male stop  412   a  has a deflected configuration, the shuttle  14  can have a contracted configuration. 
     When the first male stop  412   a  has a non-deflected configuration, the shuttle  14  can have an expanded configuration. 
     When the second male stop  412   b  has a deflected configuration, the shuttle  14  can have a contracted configuration. 
     When the second male stop  412   b  has a non-deflected configuration, the shuttle  14  can have an expanded configuration. 
     The loader  750  can have a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) and a loader control (e.g., the loader control  762 ). The shuttle  14  can be connectable to the loader control  762  via the suture  70 . The shuttle  14  and/or the suture  70  can be pullable and/or pushable into the device  188  via the loader control  762 . When the suture device  18  is removably attached to the loader  750 , the shuttle  14  can be movable relative to the shuttle track toward the device  188  via the loader control  762  and/or away from the device  188  via the loader control  762 . 
     A method can have any combination of steps disclosed herein.  FIGS.  14 A- 21 S  illustrate, for example, a method of loading a device (e.g., the device  188 ) using a loader (e.g., the loader  750 ). The method can include loading a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 ) into the device  188 . 
     Loading the shuttle  14  into the device  188  can include contracting the shuttle  14 . Contracting the shuttle  14  can include decreasing a width of the shuttle  14 . Contracting the shuttle  14  can include moving a male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ). Contracting the shuttle  14  can include deflecting a male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ). Contracting the shuttle  14  can include moving a male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ) against a deflector. 
     Loading the shuttle  14  into the device  188  can include expanding the shuttle  14 . Expanding the shuttle  14  can include increasing a width of the shuttle  14 . Expanding the shuttle  14  can include moving a male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ) into a female stop  416 . Expanding the shuttle  14  can include deflecting a male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ), for example, into a female stop  416 . Expanding the shuttle  14  can include a male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a  and/or the second male stop  412   b ) moving into a female stop (e.g., automatically moving into a female stop  416 ) as the shuttle  14  is moved into the device  188 . 
     Loading the shuttle  14  can include moving the shuttle  14  from a non-loaded configuration to a loaded configuration by moving the loader control  762  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the shuttle  14  can be in the non-loaded configuration. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  can be in the loaded configuration. 
     Loading the shuttle  14  can include contracting a leading end (e.g., a first end) of the shuttle  14 . The leading end of the shuttle  14  can contract, for example, by a leading male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) moving toward an opposite side of the shuttle  14  and/or toward a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  enters the device  188  and/or as the shuttle  14  is moved against a deflector. The leading end of the shuttle  14  can contract, for example, by the leading male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) moving toward the side of the shuttle  14  that a trailing male stop (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) can be on. The leading male stop can be on a first lateral side of the shuttle  14  and the trailing male stop can be on a second lateral side of the shuttle  14 . The first lateral side of the shuttle  14  can be opposite the second lateral side of the shuttle  14 . 
     Loading the shuttle  14  can include contracting and expanding a leading end (e.g., a first end) of the shuttle  14 . The leading end of the shuttle  14  can contract, for example, by a leading male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) moving toward an opposite side of the shuttle  14  and/or toward a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  enters the device  188  and/or as the shuttle  14  is moved against a deflector. The leading end of the shuttle  14  can expand, for example, by the leading male stop moving away from the opposite side of the shuttle  14  and/or away from the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  as the leading male stop enters a female stop (e.g., the female stop  416 ) in the upper jaw or the lower jaw of the device  188 . 
     Loading the shuttle  14  can include contracting a trailing end (e.g., a second end) of the shuttle  14 . The trailing end of the shuttle  14  can contract, for example, by a trailing male stop (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) moving toward an opposite side of the shuttle  14  and/or toward a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  enters the device  188  and/or as the shuttle  14  is moved against a deflector. The trailing end of the shuttle  14  can contract, for example, by the trailing male stop (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) moving toward the side of the shuttle  14  that the leading male stop (e.g., the first male stop  412   a ) can be on. 
     Loading the shuttle  14  can include contracting and expanding a trailing end (e.g., a second end) of the shuttle  14 . The trailing end of the shuttle  14  can contract, for example, by a trailing male stop (e.g., the second male stop  412   b ) moving toward an opposite side of the shuttle  14  and/or toward a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  as the shuttle  14  enters the device  188  and/or as the shuttle  14  is moved against a deflector. The trailing end of the shuttle  14  can expand, for example, by the trailing male stop moving away from the opposite side of the shuttle  14  and/or away from the center longitudinal axis of the shuttle  14  as the trailing male stop enters a female stop (e.g., the female stop  416 ) in the upper jaw or the lower jaw of the device  188 . 
     Loading the shuttle  14  can include moving the shuttle  14  from a non-loaded configuration to a loaded configuration by moving the loader control  762  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the shuttle  14  can be in the non-loaded configuration. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  can be in the loaded configuration. 
     When the shuttle  14  is in the non-loaded configuration, the leading end of the shuttle  14  can have a non-contracted configuration and the trailing end of the shuttle  14  can have a non-contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the non-loaded configuration, the leading end of the shuttle  14  can have a non-contracted configuration or a partially contracted configuration and the trailing end of the shuttle  14  can have a non-contracted configuration or a partially contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the non-loaded configuration, for example, the leading male stop can have a non-deflected configuration and the trailing male stop can have a non-deflected configuration. 
     When the shuttle  14  is in the loaded configuration, the leading end of the shuttle  14  can have a non-contracted or a partially contracted configuration and the trailing end of the shuttle  14  can have a partially contracted configuration or a fully contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the loaded configuration, for example, the leading male stop can have a non-deflected configuration or a partially deflected configuration and the trailing male stop can have a partially deflected configuration or a fully deflected configuration. 
     When the shuttle  14  is in the loaded configuration, the trailing end of the shuttle  14  can have a non-contracted or a partially contracted configuration and the leading end of the shuttle  14  can have a partially contracted configuration or a fully contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the loaded configuration, for example, the trailing male stop can have a non-deflected configuration or a partially deflected configuration and the leading male stop can have a partially deflected configuration or a fully deflected configuration. 
     The method can include loading a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) into the device  188 . Loading the suture  70  into the device  188  can include moving the suture  70  from a non-loaded configuration to a loaded configuration by moving the loader control  762  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the suture  70  can be in the non-loaded configuration. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the suture  70  can be in the loaded configuration. 
     Loading the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can include moving the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  from a non-loaded configuration to a loaded configuration by moving the loader control  762  from the loader control first position to the loader control second position. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control first position, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be in the non-loaded configuration. When the loader control  762  is in the loader control second position, the shuttle  14  and the suture  70  can be in the loaded configuration. 
     The method can include removably attaching the device  188  to the loader  750 . 
     The method can include detaching the device  188  from the loader  750 . 
     A method can have any combination of steps disclosed herein.  FIGS.  14 A- 21 S  illustrate, for example, a method of loading and/or unloading a device (e.g., the device  188 ). The method can include loading a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 ) into the device  188 . The method can include loading a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 ) into the device  188 , for example, from a loader (e.g., the loader  750 ). Loading the shuttle  14  can include contracting and/or expanding the shuttle  14 . During loading, the shuttle  14  can contract, for example, when a male stop (e.g., the male stop  412 ) engages with a deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  or the deflector  838 ) or with a jaw of the device  188 . During loading, the shuttle  14  can expand, for example, when the male stop  412  engages with a female stop (e.g., the female stop  416 ). The method can include unloading the shuttle  14  from the device  188 , for example, into the loader  750 . Unloading the shuttle  14  can include contracting and/or expanding the shuttle  14 . During unloading, the shuttle  14  can contract, for example, when a male stop (e.g., the male stop  412 ) engages with a lip of a female stop (e.g., the female stop  416 ) as the male stop  412  exits the female stop  416 . During unloading, the shuttle  14  can expand, for example, when the male stop  412  enters the shuttle track in the loader  750 . The device  188  can be, for example, a tissue piercer. The device  188  can be, for example, a suture device. The device  188  can be, for example, a tissue piercer and a suture device. The device  188  can be for example, a suture device that can pierce tissue, for example, with the shuttle  14 . The device  188  can be for example, a suture device that can pass suture through tissue, for example, with the shuttle  14 . 
     The loader  750  can have any combination of features shown in  FIGS.  14 A- 21 S . For example, the loader  750  can have a body (e.g., the body  751 ) having a device space (e.g., the device space  752 ), a loader control (e.g., the loader control  762 ), and a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 ). The shuttle  14  can be moveable from a shuttle first position to a shuttle second position via the loader control  762 . A device (e.g., the device  188 ) can be positionable in the device space  752 . The device  188  can be, for example, a tissue piercer. The device  188  can be, for example, a suture device. The device  188  can be, for example, a tissue piercer and a suture device. The device  188  can be for example, a suture device that can pierce tissue, for example, with the shuttle  14 . The device  188  can be for example, a suture device that can pass suture through tissue, for example, with the shuttle  14 . When the device  188  is positioned in the device space  752 , the shuttle  14  can be moveable from the shuttle first position to the shuttle second position. The shuttle  14  can be more contracted when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position. 
     When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle  14  can have a non-contracted configuration, and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle can have a contracted configuration. The shuttle  14  can be wider when the shuttle  14  is in the non-contracted configuration than when the shuttle  14  is in the contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the shuttle  14  can be outside the device  188 , and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the shuttle  14  can be inside the device  188 . A first end of the shuttle  14  can be wider when the shuttle  14  is in the non-contracted configuration than when the shuttle  14  is in the contracted configuration, and/or a second end of the shuttle  14  can be wider when the shuttle  14  is in the non-contracted configuration than when the shuttle  14  is in the contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first end of the shuttle  14  and the second end of the shuttle  14  can be outside the device  188 , and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first end of the shuttle  14  can be inside the device  188  and the second end of the shuttle  14  can be outside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position, the first end of the shuttle  14  and the second end of the shuttle  14  can be outside the device  188 , and when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position, the first end of the shuttle  14  and the second end of the shuttle  14  can be inside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  has the non-contracted configuration, a first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can have a non-contracted configuration and a second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can have a non-contracted configuration. When the shuttle  14  has the contracted configuration, a first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can have a contracted configuration and a second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can have a contracted configuration, and/or when the shuttle  14  has the contracted configuration, the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be more contracted than the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14 . When the shuttle  14  has the contracted configuration, the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be inside the device  188  and the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be outside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  has the contracted configuration, the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  and the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be inside the device  188 . When the shuttle  14  has the non-contracted configuration, a width of a contractible and expandable portion of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can the same as a width of a contractible and expandable portion of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14 . 
     The contractible and expandable portion of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be, for example, the portion of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  having the first male stop  412   a . The contractible and expandable portion of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be, for example, the first male stop  412   a . The width of the contractible and expandable portion of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14 , can be, for example, the width of the shuttle  14  between a first lateral terminal end of the shuttle  14  and a second lateral terminal end of the shuttle  14 , where the first lateral terminal end of the shuttle  14  on the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be, for example, an edge or surface of the first male stop  412   a , and where the second lateral terminal end of the shuttle  14  on the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be, for example, an edge or surface of the shuttle  14  opposite the first male stop  412   a.    
     The contractible and expandable portion of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle can be, for example, the portion of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  having the second male stop  412   b . The contractible and expandable portion of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be, for example, the second male stop  412   b . The width of the contractible and expandable portion of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14 , can be, for example, the width of the shuttle  14  between a first lateral terminal end of the shuttle  14  and a second lateral terminal end of the shuttle  14 , where the first lateral terminal end of the shuttle  14  on the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be, for example, an edge or surface of the second male stop  412   b , and where the second lateral terminal end of the shuttle  14  on the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be, for example, an edge or surface of the shuttle  14  opposite the first male stop  412   a.    
     When the shuttle  14  has the non-contracted configuration, the width of the contractible and expandable portion of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  and the width of the contractible and expandable portion of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be measured along an axis perpendicular to a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle. 
     When the shuttle  14  has the non-contracted configuration, a width of the widest portion of a contractible and expandable section of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be less than or greater than a width of the widest portion of a contractible and expandable section of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14 . 
     When the shuttle  14  has the contracted configuration, a width of the widest portion of a contractible and expandable section of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be the same as a width of the widest portion of a contractible and expandable section of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14 . 
     When the shuttle  14  has the contracted configuration, a width of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be less than a width of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14 , or when the shuttle  14  has the contracted configuration, a width of the widest portion of a contractible and expandable section of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be less than a width of the widest portion of a contractible and expandable section of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14 . 
     When the shuttle  14  has the non-contracted configuration, the width of the first longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  and the width of the second longitudinal end of the shuttle  14  can be measured along an axis perpendicular to a center longitudinal axis of the shuttle. 
     The loader  750  can have a deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ). The shuttle  14  can be engageable with the deflector. When the shuttle  14  is engaged with the deflector, the shuttle  14  can have the contracted configuration. 
     The loader  750  can have a first deflector (e.g., the deflector  836 ) and a second deflector (e.g., the deflector  838 ). The shuttle  14  can be engageable with the first deflector and/or with the second deflector. When the shuttle  14  is engaged with the first deflector and/or with the second deflector, the shuttle  14  can have the contracted configuration. 
     The loader  750  can have a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ). The shuttle  14  can be connectable to the loader control  762  via the suture  70 . The suture  70  can be under more tension when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle second position than when the shuttle  14  is in the shuttle first position. 
     The loader  750  can have any combination of features shown in  FIGS.  14 A- 21 S . For example, the loader  750  can have a body (e.g., the body  751 ) having a device space (e.g., the device space  752 ), a loader control (e.g., the loader control  762 ), a deflector (e.g., the deflector  836  and/or the deflector  838 ), and a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 ). The shuttle  14  can be contractible and expandable. The shuttle  14  can be contractible via the deflector. When the shuttle  14  is in contact with the deflector, the shuttle  14  can have a contracted configuration. The shuttle  14  can be biased to have an expanded configuration. The deflector can contract the shuttle  14 , for example, from the expanded configuration to the contracted configuration. A device (e.g., the device  188 ) can be positionable in the device space  752 . When the device is positioned in the device space  752  and the shuttle  14  has the contracted configuration, the shuttle  14  can be moveable into the device  188  via the loader control  762 . The device  188  can be, for example, a tissue piercer. The device  188  can be, for example, a suture device. The device  188  can be, for example, a tissue piercer and a suture device. The device  188  can be for example, a suture device that can pierce tissue, for example, with the shuttle  14 . The device  188  can be for example, a suture device that can pass suture through tissue, for example, with the shuttle  14 . 
     The loader  750  can be used to load the device  188  with the shuttle  14  and/or with the suture  70 . 
     Any systems, devices, features, and/or methods disclosed, illustrated, and/or contemplated in U.S. application Ser. No. 14/255,945 filed Apr. 17, 2014 (published as US 2014/0316443), in International Application No. PCT/US2019/025203 filed Apr. 1, 2019 (published as WO 2019/191768), in U.S. application Ser. No. 16/733,740 filed Jan. 3, 2020 (published as US Publication No. 2021/0204934), in International Application No. PCT/US2020/060888 filed Nov. 17, 2020 (published as WO 2021/137963), in U.S. application Ser. No. 16/734,406 filed Jan. 6, 2020 (published as US Publication No. 2021/0204935), in PCT/US2020/060914 filed Nov. 17, 2020 (published as WO 2021/141675), and/or in U.S. application Ser. No. 17/446,259 filed Aug. 27, 2021 titled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PASSING SUTURE, each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety for all purposes—can be used with the loader  750  for any purpose (e.g., to load any of the systems, devices, and/or features in any of these applications with a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) and/or with a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 ) and/or to unload any of the systems, devices, and/or features in any of these applications with a suture (e.g., the suture  70 ) and/or with a shuttle (e.g., the shuttle  14 )) and/or can be combined with any of the systems, devices, features, and/or methods disclosed, illustrated, and/or contemplated herein for any purpose. 
     It is apparent to one skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made to this disclosure, and equivalents employed, without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Elements shown with any variation are exemplary for the specific variation and can be used on other variations within this disclosure. Any elements described herein as singular can be pluralized (i.e., anything described as “one” can be more than one). Any species element of a genus element can have the characteristics or elements of any other species element of that genus. The words “may” and “can” are interchangeable (e.g., “may” can be replaced with “can” and “can” can be replaced with “may”). The above-described configurations, elements or complete assemblies and methods and their elements for carrying out the invention, and variations of aspects of the invention can be combined and modified with each other in any combination. Any phrase involving an “A and/or B” construction or similar construction can mean (1) A alone, (2) B alone, (3) A and B together. Any range disclosed can include any subrange of the range disclosed, for example, a range of 1-10 units can include 2-10 units, 8-10 units, or any other subrange.